<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Markus+Friedrich</id>
	<title>TARGET 3001! PCB Design Freeware is a Layout CAD Software|Support, Tutorials, Shop - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Markus+Friedrich"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php/Special:Contributions/Markus_Friedrich"/>
	<updated>2026-04-06T10:56:55Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.42.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Flip_the_PCB&amp;diff=28998</id>
		<title>Flip the PCB</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Flip_the_PCB&amp;diff=28998"/>
		<updated>2021-09-13T14:53:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image: Layout wenden_1_e.jpg|none|The icon to flip the layout]]Image: Edit the layout from &amp;quot;the bottom&amp;quot; side.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Layout wenden_2_e.jpg|none|Layout gewendet]]Image: The layout appears flipped, coppper bottom can be edited from top view.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inner layers (if there are some) get rearranged too.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Platine wenden]][[fr: Retourner le CI]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Layout_wenden_2_e.jpg&amp;diff=28997</id>
		<title>File:Layout wenden 2 e.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Layout_wenden_2_e.jpg&amp;diff=28997"/>
		<updated>2021-09-13T14:51:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Layout_wenden_1_e.jpg&amp;diff=28996</id>
		<title>File:Layout wenden 1 e.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Layout_wenden_1_e.jpg&amp;diff=28996"/>
		<updated>2021-09-13T14:51:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Flip_the_PCB&amp;diff=28995</id>
		<title>Flip the PCB</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Flip_the_PCB&amp;diff=28995"/>
		<updated>2021-09-13T14:23:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: Created page with &amp;quot;The icon to flip the layoutImage: Edit the layout from &amp;quot;the bottom&amp;quot; side.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  Layout gewendetI...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image: Layout wenden_1_e.jpg|none|The icon to flip the layout]]Image: Edit the layout from &amp;quot;the bottom&amp;quot; side.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Layout wenden_2_e.jpg|none|Layout gewendet]]Image: The layout appears flipped, coppper bottom can be edited from top view.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inner layers get rearranged as well.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Platine wenden]][[fr: Retourner le CI]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_a_new_component&amp;diff=28994</id>
		<title>Create a new component</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_a_new_component&amp;diff=28994"/>
		<updated>2021-08-31T14:24:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* Derive package from existing package */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Where to start in TARGET =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In TARGET see: &#039;&#039;&#039;Schematic menu Components/Create a new component...&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:CreateNewComponent.jpg|Schematic menu|none]]Image: Schematic menu &amp;quot;Components&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or: Schematic toolbar icon &amp;quot;Import component [Ins]&amp;quot;: &#039;&#039;&#039;Component browser menu Component/Create new component...&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:BtlBrws_NeuesBtlErstel_el.jpg|Component browser menu Create new component in the schematic view]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Component browser menu &amp;quot;Create new component...&amp;quot; in the schematic view&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This area guides you step by step to create in best practise a new component. Already existing, similar components or its elements can be used. All automatic functions are offered during this process so that you most quickly will be able to use your desired part without unnecessary double work.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= The opening dialog =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:NeuesBtlErstellenDlg_e.jpg|378px|The dialog Create new component]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The dialog Create new component&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;First decide which &#039;&#039;&#039;package&#039;&#039;&#039; (footprint pattern with package outline) you would like to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Package for layout use =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All information on the component is given in its data sheet. Now search for it in the TARGET package browser. It is a tab in the component browser.  If you can not find a matching one among the existing you need to &amp;quot;Draw an own package&amp;quot;. So click the orange field in the dialog and then start with the magic wand in the sidebar to the left. Try and use the assistants:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Derive package from existing package  ==&lt;br /&gt;
(You should know the package name!)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Bauteil_ableiten_1e.jpg|none|Derive a new package from an existing one 1]]Image: Start creating a new component&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Bauteil_ableiten_2e.jpg|none|Derive a new package from an existing one 2]]Image: Go on to draw an own package&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Bauteil_ableiten_3e.jpg|none|Derive a new package from an existing one 3]]Image: Select the one to derive the new package from&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the existing package, Dil16 in this case (1), press the search button (2). If it is suitable for adaption, press the OK button (3). Get the part on the canvas to adapt/edit it and save it under a different name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Package Generator (incl. 3D model) ==&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Package Generator ]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Package via script ==&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Package assistant]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create package manually ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only if you can not use an assistant you should start to draw a package outline manually and arrange the pads manually around it. How to do this best, please read here:&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Edit_component#How_to_draw_a_package|How to draw a package]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save the package afterwards to the data base using a suitable name. A dialog pops up allowing to do futher changes. If you don&#039;t meed to do any changes, please close this dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now open menu item &amp;quot;Create a new component&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;&#039;again&#039;&#039;&#039;. Now click the blue panel &amp;quot;Select a different package&amp;quot; and select the one you just had drawn (remember the package name). Now get on and draw the schematic symbol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Symbol for schematic use =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Continue top left with the magic wand in order to create a symbol: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:ZauberstabBtlErstellen_e.jpg|The options of the magic wand]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 3: The options of the magic wand when creating a schematic symbol... Will be explained in the following chapters.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Use a standard symbol (generic) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe a &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Generic symbols|standard symbol (a generic)]]&#039;&#039;&#039; matches. Select one from the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:GenericBtlErstellung_e.jpg|Select a generic symbol|Select a generic symbol]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 4: Select a generic symbol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Generic is just another word for &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;primitive&amp;quot;. You need to check the pin numbering of the generic symbol and synchronize it with the pad numbering of the package. For this reason a separate dialog will open. Pin number and pad number (cipher) need to be identical. It&#039;s just the same cipher of pin and pad which cares for their logical/electrical linkage.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Derive symbol from existing component ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually you can derive a new symbol from an existing component. The idea is to copy a symbol of an existing component to your canvas in order to modify it independently from its source.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:BtlAbleiten_e.jpg|Derive a symbol from an already existing component.|Derive a symbol from an already existing component.]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 5: Derive a symbol from an already existing component. Enter the component name to the search line. Now the symbol appears on the canvas and you can modify it as you please. If a component&#039;s symbol consists of several sub-symbols (e. g. gates) you can inspect them each by switching the views top left in the dialog.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Symbol generator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create an individual symbol by the use of the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Symbol generator]]&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:SymbGenerator_e.jpg|Symbol Generator|Symbol Generator]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 6: The symbol generator creates a basic structure of a symbol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In this case it has 14 pins made of four sub symbols (three by four pins plus two). The first sub symbol is shown here, the last one (mostly it is the power supplies) is treated like a &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot;, see ticked box at &amp;quot;last symbol as rest&amp;quot;. The tick at &amp;quot;Alphanumeric&amp;quot; places characters and ciphers instead of subsequent numbers. Like a matrix: A1, A2, ... B1, B2, ... &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The field: &amp;quot;Arrangement&amp;quot; defines the suggestion for a positioning of the overall number of pins at the new symbol. In our case the pins shall be placed left.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Result of the settings according to the above dialog:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:dreiGatterZweiPinsRest_e.jpg|Three gates, two power connections (as rest)|Result of the above setting]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 7: A 14 pin symbol with 4 sub symbols, see indices at the component handles. The last sub symbol is treated as &amp;quot;[[Rests of components|Rest]]&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Symbol via script ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This assistant allows the creation of a symbol using a script.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:SymbolPerScript_e.jpg|Create a symbol by a script|Create a symbol by a script]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 9: [[Symbol assistant|The symbol assistant]]: Double click a line to edit a pins properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Draw a symbol manually ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Edit_component#How_to_draw_a_symbol]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== More than one symbols (gates) in one component ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Edit_component#For_versions_V18_and_younger:|Draw multiple gates in one component]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit selected pin names in a text editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
there is a link to another source: [[Pin#Edit_selected_pin_names_in_a_text_editor|Edit selected pin names in a text editor]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:AnschlussNamenAlsText_e.jpg|Edit selected pin names in a text editor|Edit selected pin names in a text editor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 8: Use the Copy-Paste function to handle all pin-texts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight pins in the symbol, all or only parts of them. Then use this function in order to get the dialog shown. Take the pin names from the data sheet or from any other digital source to your clipboard and paste them to the text area of the dialog. They may come in a bit weird but you can arrange the text corretly so that every pin number has the right pin name aside. That&#039;s all. For Ball Grid Arrays (BGA), having a matrix structure, pin-numbers can be displayed alphanumeric. This eases the assignment of pin names coming from the clipboard.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Pins according to processor scheme ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a separate article on this topic. Please follow the link: [[Pin#Arrange_pins_according_to_processor_scheme |Arrange pins according to processor scheme]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a symbol like a ball grid array (BGA) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:BGAAnschlErzDlg_e.jpg|Symbol like a BGA]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 10: The dialog &amp;quot;Create BGA pins&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The checkbox &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;flipped&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; means that the naming of rows and columns get mirrored by its diagonal: Line A gets row A and vice versa. The checkbox &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Z&amp;quot; allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; means: Character Z can easily be mixed up with cipher 2 which can lead to uncertainties in naming the matrix nodes. Nevertheless you can use a Z: Tick the box.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Save component =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When saving a part, it is possible to edit the just created part again. If you don&#039;t want/need this, just close this intermediate dialog with the red X at the top right. You always save a component as a USER component in the [[component database]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Create a new component]][[de:Neues Bauteil erstellen...]][[fr:Créer un nouveau composant]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Bauteil_ableiten_2e.jpg&amp;diff=28993</id>
		<title>File:Bauteil ableiten 2e.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Bauteil_ableiten_2e.jpg&amp;diff=28993"/>
		<updated>2021-08-31T14:22:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: Markus Friedrich uploaded a new version of File:Bauteil ableiten 2e.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Bauteil_ableiten_3e.jpg&amp;diff=28992</id>
		<title>File:Bauteil ableiten 3e.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Bauteil_ableiten_3e.jpg&amp;diff=28992"/>
		<updated>2021-08-31T14:20:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Bauteil_ableiten_2e.jpg&amp;diff=28991</id>
		<title>File:Bauteil ableiten 2e.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Bauteil_ableiten_2e.jpg&amp;diff=28991"/>
		<updated>2021-08-31T14:20:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_a_new_component&amp;diff=28990</id>
		<title>Create a new component</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_a_new_component&amp;diff=28990"/>
		<updated>2021-08-31T14:19:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* Derive package from existing package */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Where to start in TARGET =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In TARGET see: &#039;&#039;&#039;Schematic menu Components/Create a new component...&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:CreateNewComponent.jpg|Schematic menu|none]]Image: Schematic menu &amp;quot;Components&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or: Schematic toolbar icon &amp;quot;Import component [Ins]&amp;quot;: &#039;&#039;&#039;Component browser menu Component/Create new component...&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:BtlBrws_NeuesBtlErstel_el.jpg|Component browser menu Create new component in the schematic view]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Component browser menu &amp;quot;Create new component...&amp;quot; in the schematic view&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This area guides you step by step to create in best practise a new component. Already existing, similar components or its elements can be used. All automatic functions are offered during this process so that you most quickly will be able to use your desired part without unnecessary double work.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= The opening dialog =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:NeuesBtlErstellenDlg_e.jpg|378px|The dialog Create new component]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The dialog Create new component&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;First decide which &#039;&#039;&#039;package&#039;&#039;&#039; (footprint pattern with package outline) you would like to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Package for layout use =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All information on the component is given in its data sheet. Now search for it in the TARGET package browser. It is a tab in the component browser.  If you can not find a matching one among the existing you need to &amp;quot;Draw an own package&amp;quot;. So click the orange field in the dialog and then start with the magic wand in the sidebar to the left. Try and use the assistants:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Derive package from existing package  ==&lt;br /&gt;
(You should know the package name!)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Bauteil_ableiten_1e.jpg|none|Derive a new package from an existing one 1]]Image: Start creating a new component&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Bauteil_ableiten_2e.jpg|none|Derive a new package from an existing one 2]]Image: Go on to draw an own package&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Bauteil_ableiten_3e.jpg|none|Derive a new package from an existing one 3]]Image: Select the one to derive the new package from&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the existing package, Dil16 in this case (1.), press the search button (2.). If it is suitable for adaption, press the OK button (3.). Get the part on the canvas to adapt/edit it and save it under a different name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Package Generator (incl. 3D model) ==&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Package Generator ]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Package via script ==&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Package assistant]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create package manually ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only if you can not use an assistant you should start to draw a package outline manually and arrange the pads manually around it. How to do this best, please read here:&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Edit_component#How_to_draw_a_package|How to draw a package]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save the package afterwards to the data base using a suitable name. A dialog pops up allowing to do futher changes. If you don&#039;t meed to do any changes, please close this dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now open menu item &amp;quot;Create a new component&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;&#039;again&#039;&#039;&#039;. Now click the blue panel &amp;quot;Select a different package&amp;quot; and select the one you just had drawn (remember the package name). Now get on and draw the schematic symbol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Symbol for schematic use =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Continue top left with the magic wand in order to create a symbol: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:ZauberstabBtlErstellen_e.jpg|The options of the magic wand]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 3: The options of the magic wand when creating a schematic symbol... Will be explained in the following chapters.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Use a standard symbol (generic) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe a &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Generic symbols|standard symbol (a generic)]]&#039;&#039;&#039; matches. Select one from the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:GenericBtlErstellung_e.jpg|Select a generic symbol|Select a generic symbol]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 4: Select a generic symbol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Generic is just another word for &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;primitive&amp;quot;. You need to check the pin numbering of the generic symbol and synchronize it with the pad numbering of the package. For this reason a separate dialog will open. Pin number and pad number (cipher) need to be identical. It&#039;s just the same cipher of pin and pad which cares for their logical/electrical linkage.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Derive symbol from existing component ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually you can derive a new symbol from an existing component. The idea is to copy a symbol of an existing component to your canvas in order to modify it independently from its source.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:BtlAbleiten_e.jpg|Derive a symbol from an already existing component.|Derive a symbol from an already existing component.]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 5: Derive a symbol from an already existing component. Enter the component name to the search line. Now the symbol appears on the canvas and you can modify it as you please. If a component&#039;s symbol consists of several sub-symbols (e. g. gates) you can inspect them each by switching the views top left in the dialog.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Symbol generator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create an individual symbol by the use of the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Symbol generator]]&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:SymbGenerator_e.jpg|Symbol Generator|Symbol Generator]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 6: The symbol generator creates a basic structure of a symbol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In this case it has 14 pins made of four sub symbols (three by four pins plus two). The first sub symbol is shown here, the last one (mostly it is the power supplies) is treated like a &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot;, see ticked box at &amp;quot;last symbol as rest&amp;quot;. The tick at &amp;quot;Alphanumeric&amp;quot; places characters and ciphers instead of subsequent numbers. Like a matrix: A1, A2, ... B1, B2, ... &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The field: &amp;quot;Arrangement&amp;quot; defines the suggestion for a positioning of the overall number of pins at the new symbol. In our case the pins shall be placed left.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Result of the settings according to the above dialog:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:dreiGatterZweiPinsRest_e.jpg|Three gates, two power connections (as rest)|Result of the above setting]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 7: A 14 pin symbol with 4 sub symbols, see indices at the component handles. The last sub symbol is treated as &amp;quot;[[Rests of components|Rest]]&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Symbol via script ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This assistant allows the creation of a symbol using a script.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:SymbolPerScript_e.jpg|Create a symbol by a script|Create a symbol by a script]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 9: [[Symbol assistant|The symbol assistant]]: Double click a line to edit a pins properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Draw a symbol manually ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Edit_component#How_to_draw_a_symbol]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== More than one symbols (gates) in one component ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Edit_component#For_versions_V18_and_younger:|Draw multiple gates in one component]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit selected pin names in a text editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
there is a link to another source: [[Pin#Edit_selected_pin_names_in_a_text_editor|Edit selected pin names in a text editor]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:AnschlussNamenAlsText_e.jpg|Edit selected pin names in a text editor|Edit selected pin names in a text editor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 8: Use the Copy-Paste function to handle all pin-texts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight pins in the symbol, all or only parts of them. Then use this function in order to get the dialog shown. Take the pin names from the data sheet or from any other digital source to your clipboard and paste them to the text area of the dialog. They may come in a bit weird but you can arrange the text corretly so that every pin number has the right pin name aside. That&#039;s all. For Ball Grid Arrays (BGA), having a matrix structure, pin-numbers can be displayed alphanumeric. This eases the assignment of pin names coming from the clipboard.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Pins according to processor scheme ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a separate article on this topic. Please follow the link: [[Pin#Arrange_pins_according_to_processor_scheme |Arrange pins according to processor scheme]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a symbol like a ball grid array (BGA) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:BGAAnschlErzDlg_e.jpg|Symbol like a BGA]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 10: The dialog &amp;quot;Create BGA pins&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The checkbox &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;flipped&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; means that the naming of rows and columns get mirrored by its diagonal: Line A gets row A and vice versa. The checkbox &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Z&amp;quot; allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; means: Character Z can easily be mixed up with cipher 2 which can lead to uncertainties in naming the matrix nodes. Nevertheless you can use a Z: Tick the box.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Save component =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When saving a part, it is possible to edit the just created part again. If you don&#039;t want/need this, just close this intermediate dialog with the red X at the top right. You always save a component as a USER component in the [[component database]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Create a new component]][[de:Neues Bauteil erstellen...]][[fr:Créer un nouveau composant]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Bauteil_ableiten_1e.jpg&amp;diff=28989</id>
		<title>File:Bauteil ableiten 1e.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Bauteil_ableiten_1e.jpg&amp;diff=28989"/>
		<updated>2021-08-31T14:18:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_a_new_component&amp;diff=28988</id>
		<title>Create a new component</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_a_new_component&amp;diff=28988"/>
		<updated>2021-08-31T14:18:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* Derive package from existing package (you should know the package name!) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Where to start in TARGET =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In TARGET see: &#039;&#039;&#039;Schematic menu Components/Create a new component...&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:CreateNewComponent.jpg|Schematic menu|none]]Image: Schematic menu &amp;quot;Components&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or: Schematic toolbar icon &amp;quot;Import component [Ins]&amp;quot;: &#039;&#039;&#039;Component browser menu Component/Create new component...&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:BtlBrws_NeuesBtlErstel_el.jpg|Component browser menu Create new component in the schematic view]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Component browser menu &amp;quot;Create new component...&amp;quot; in the schematic view&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This area guides you step by step to create in best practise a new component. Already existing, similar components or its elements can be used. All automatic functions are offered during this process so that you most quickly will be able to use your desired part without unnecessary double work.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= The opening dialog =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:NeuesBtlErstellenDlg_e.jpg|378px|The dialog Create new component]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The dialog Create new component&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;First decide which &#039;&#039;&#039;package&#039;&#039;&#039; (footprint pattern with package outline) you would like to use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Package for layout use =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All information on the component is given in its data sheet. Now search for it in the TARGET package browser. It is a tab in the component browser.  If you can not find a matching one among the existing you need to &amp;quot;Draw an own package&amp;quot;. So click the orange field in the dialog and then start with the magic wand in the sidebar to the left. Try and use the assistants:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Derive package from existing package  ==&lt;br /&gt;
(You should know the package name!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Bauteil_ableiten_1e.jpg|none|Derive a new package from an existing one 1]]Image: Start creating a new component&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Bauteil_ableiten_2e.jpg|none|Derive a new package from an existing one 2]]Image: Go on to draw an own package&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Bauteil_ableiten_3e.jpg|none|Derive a new package from an existing one 3]]Image: Select the one to derive the new package from &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the name of the existing package, Dil16 in this case (1.), press the search button (2.). If it is suitable for adaption, press the OK button (3.). Get the part on the canvas to adapt/edit it and save it under a different name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Package Generator (incl. 3D model) ==&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Package Generator ]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Package via script ==&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Package assistant]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create package manually ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only if you can not use an assistant you should start to draw a package outline manually and arrange the pads manually around it. How to do this best, please read here:&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Edit_component#How_to_draw_a_package|How to draw a package]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Save the package afterwards to the data base using a suitable name. A dialog pops up allowing to do futher changes. If you don&#039;t meed to do any changes, please close this dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now open menu item &amp;quot;Create a new component&amp;quot; &#039;&#039;&#039;again&#039;&#039;&#039;. Now click the blue panel &amp;quot;Select a different package&amp;quot; and select the one you just had drawn (remember the package name). Now get on and draw the schematic symbol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Symbol for schematic use =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Continue top left with the magic wand in order to create a symbol: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:ZauberstabBtlErstellen_e.jpg|The options of the magic wand]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 3: The options of the magic wand when creating a schematic symbol... Will be explained in the following chapters.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Use a standard symbol (generic) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Maybe a &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Generic symbols|standard symbol (a generic)]]&#039;&#039;&#039; matches. Select one from the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:GenericBtlErstellung_e.jpg|Select a generic symbol|Select a generic symbol]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 4: Select a generic symbol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Generic is just another word for &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;primitive&amp;quot;. You need to check the pin numbering of the generic symbol and synchronize it with the pad numbering of the package. For this reason a separate dialog will open. Pin number and pad number (cipher) need to be identical. It&#039;s just the same cipher of pin and pad which cares for their logical/electrical linkage.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Derive symbol from existing component ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually you can derive a new symbol from an existing component. The idea is to copy a symbol of an existing component to your canvas in order to modify it independently from its source.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:BtlAbleiten_e.jpg|Derive a symbol from an already existing component.|Derive a symbol from an already existing component.]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 5: Derive a symbol from an already existing component. Enter the component name to the search line. Now the symbol appears on the canvas and you can modify it as you please. If a component&#039;s symbol consists of several sub-symbols (e. g. gates) you can inspect them each by switching the views top left in the dialog.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Symbol generator ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create an individual symbol by the use of the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Symbol generator]]&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:SymbGenerator_e.jpg|Symbol Generator|Symbol Generator]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 6: The symbol generator creates a basic structure of a symbol.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In this case it has 14 pins made of four sub symbols (three by four pins plus two). The first sub symbol is shown here, the last one (mostly it is the power supplies) is treated like a &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot;, see ticked box at &amp;quot;last symbol as rest&amp;quot;. The tick at &amp;quot;Alphanumeric&amp;quot; places characters and ciphers instead of subsequent numbers. Like a matrix: A1, A2, ... B1, B2, ... &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The field: &amp;quot;Arrangement&amp;quot; defines the suggestion for a positioning of the overall number of pins at the new symbol. In our case the pins shall be placed left.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Result of the settings according to the above dialog:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:dreiGatterZweiPinsRest_e.jpg|Three gates, two power connections (as rest)|Result of the above setting]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 7: A 14 pin symbol with 4 sub symbols, see indices at the component handles. The last sub symbol is treated as &amp;quot;[[Rests of components|Rest]]&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Symbol via script ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This assistant allows the creation of a symbol using a script.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:SymbolPerScript_e.jpg|Create a symbol by a script|Create a symbol by a script]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 9: [[Symbol assistant|The symbol assistant]]: Double click a line to edit a pins properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Draw a symbol manually ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Edit_component#How_to_draw_a_symbol]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== More than one symbols (gates) in one component ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Edit_component#For_versions_V18_and_younger:|Draw multiple gates in one component]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit selected pin names in a text editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
there is a link to another source: [[Pin#Edit_selected_pin_names_in_a_text_editor|Edit selected pin names in a text editor]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:AnschlussNamenAlsText_e.jpg|Edit selected pin names in a text editor|Edit selected pin names in a text editor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 8: Use the Copy-Paste function to handle all pin-texts&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight pins in the symbol, all or only parts of them. Then use this function in order to get the dialog shown. Take the pin names from the data sheet or from any other digital source to your clipboard and paste them to the text area of the dialog. They may come in a bit weird but you can arrange the text corretly so that every pin number has the right pin name aside. That&#039;s all. For Ball Grid Arrays (BGA), having a matrix structure, pin-numbers can be displayed alphanumeric. This eases the assignment of pin names coming from the clipboard.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Pins according to processor scheme ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a separate article on this topic. Please follow the link: [[Pin#Arrange_pins_according_to_processor_scheme |Arrange pins according to processor scheme]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a symbol like a ball grid array (BGA) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:BGAAnschlErzDlg_e.jpg|Symbol like a BGA]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image 10: The dialog &amp;quot;Create BGA pins&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The checkbox &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;flipped&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; means that the naming of rows and columns get mirrored by its diagonal: Line A gets row A and vice versa. The checkbox &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Z&amp;quot; allowed&#039;&#039;&#039; means: Character Z can easily be mixed up with cipher 2 which can lead to uncertainties in naming the matrix nodes. Nevertheless you can use a Z: Tick the box.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Save component =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When saving a part, it is possible to edit the just created part again. If you don&#039;t want/need this, just close this intermediate dialog with the red X at the top right. You always save a component as a USER component in the [[component database]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Create a new component]][[de:Neues Bauteil erstellen...]][[fr:Créer un nouveau composant]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28987</id>
		<title>Insert a resistor in series as limiter afterwards</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28987"/>
		<updated>2021-08-30T12:00:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Simply drop the resistor onto the existing signal wire in the schematic. The signal hit will be ripped up in order to insert the resistor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand1.jpg|none|Resistor imported and aligned]] Image: Resistor fetched from the component database and aligned. Click [[M1]] to &amp;quot;drop&amp;quot; (= place on the existing signal).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand2_e.jpg|none|Hint 1]] Image: Clic Yes delivers the following image:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand3_e.jpg|none|Hint 2]] Image: The signal name Sig$22 is generated automatically. Which signal line keeps the name and which gets a new name depends, among other things, on its length. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand5_e.jpg|none|Hint 3]] Image: Note on the further procedure in the layout. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tracks that were already laid in the layout remain for the moment. They need to be ripped up manually if the resistor package is to be inserted. The signal part Sig$22 would have to be [[rename signal|renamed by hand]] in the layout. If the track is not too complicated, delete the track completely and re-route it. The pad of the package in the layout will automatically bring the new signal name along, in our case Sig$22. When rerouting the track, this signal name would be picked up and the rerouted track would carry this signal name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand4.jpg|none|Resistor in place]] Image: Resistor placed in series (Schematic).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Vorwiderstand nachträglich einfügen]][[fr:Insérer une résistance en série avec du recul]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28986</id>
		<title>Insert a resistor in series as limiter afterwards</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28986"/>
		<updated>2021-08-30T10:51:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Simply drop the resistor onto the existing signal wire in the schematic. The signal hit will be ripped up in order to insert the resistor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand1.jpg|none|Resistor imported and aligned]] Image: Resistor fetched from the component database and aligned. Click [[M1]] to &amp;quot;drop&amp;quot; (= place on the existing signal).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand2_e.jpg|none|Hint 1]] Image: Clic Yes delivers the following image:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand3_e.jpg|none|Hint 2]] Image: The signal name Sig$22 is generated automatically. Which signal line keeps the name and which gets a new name depends, among other things, on its length. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand5_e.jpg|none|Hint 3]] Image: Note on the further procedure in the layout. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tracks that were already laid in the layout remain for the moment. They need to be ripped up manually if the resistor package is to be inserted. The signal part Sig$22 would have to be [[rename signal|renamed by hand]] in the layout. If the track is not too complicated, delete the track completely and re-route it. The pad of the package in the layout will automatically bring the new signal name along, in our case Sig$22. When rerouting the track, this signal name would be picked up and the rerouted track would carry this signal name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand4.jpg|none|Resistor in place]] Image: Resistor placed in series (Schematic).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Vorwiderstand nachträglich einfügen]][[fr:Insérer ensuite une résistance en série]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28985</id>
		<title>Insert a resistor in series as limiter afterwards</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28985"/>
		<updated>2021-08-30T10:50:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Simply drop the resistor onto the existing signal wire in the schematic. The signal hit will be ripped up in order to insert the resistor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand1.jpg|none|Resistor imported and aligned]] Image: Resistor fetched from the component database and aligned. Click [[M1]] to &amp;quot;drop&amp;quot; (= place on the existing signal).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand2_e.jpg|none|Hint 1]] Image: Clic Yes delivers the following image:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand3_e.jpg|none|Hint 2]] Image: The signal name Sig$22 is generated automatically. Which signal line keeps the name and which gets a new name depends, among other things, on its length. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand5_e.jpg|none|Hint 3]] Image: Note on the further procedure in the layout. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tracks that were already laid in the layout remain for the moment. They need to be ripped up manually if the resistor package is to be inserted. The signal part Sig$22 would have to be [[rename signal|renamed by hand]] in the layout. If the track is not too complicated, delete the track completely and re-route it. The pad of the package in the layout will automatically bring the new signal name along, in our case Sig$22. When rerouting the track, this signal name would be picked up and the rerouted track would carry this signal name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand4.jpg|none|Resistor in place]] Image: Resistor placed in series (Schematic).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Vorwiderstand nachträglich einfügen]][[en:Insert a resistor in series as limiter afterwards]][[fr:Insérer ensuite une résistance en série]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28984</id>
		<title>Insert a resistor in series as limiter afterwards</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28984"/>
		<updated>2021-08-30T10:49:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Simply drop the resistor onto the existing signal wire in the schematic. The hit signal will be ripped up in order to insert the resistor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand1.jpg|none|Resistor imported and aligned]] Image: Resistor fetched from the component database and aligned. Click [[M1]] to &amp;quot;drop&amp;quot; (= place on the existing signal).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand2_e.jpg|none|Hint 1]] Image: Clic Yes delivers the following image:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand3_e.jpg|none|Hint 2]] Image: The signal name Sig$22 is generated automatically. Which signal line keeps the name and which gets a new name depends, among other things, on its length. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand5_e.jpg|none|Hint 3]] Image: Note on the further procedure in the layout. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tracks that were already laid in the layout remain for the moment. They need to be ripped up manually if the resistor package is to be inserted. The signal part Sig$22 would have to be [[rename signal|renamed by hand]] in the layout. If the track is not too complicated, delete the track completely and re-route it. The pad of the package in the layout will automatically bring the new signal name along, in our case Sig$22. When rerouting the track, this signal name would be picked up and the rerouted track would carry this signal name.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand4.jpg|none|Resistor in place]] Image: Resistor placed in series (Schematic).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Vorwiderstand nachträglich einfügen]][[en:Insert a resistor in series as limiter afterwards]][[fr:Insérer ensuite une résistance en série]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Page&amp;diff=28983</id>
		<title>Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Page&amp;diff=28983"/>
		<updated>2021-08-30T09:15:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* Migrate a schematic page to another project */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Organise and handle schematic pages within the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Sidebar]]&#039;&#039;&#039; on the right edge of screen. In the sidebar please see section [[Sidebar#Section_Schematic_pages|&amp;quot;Schematic Page&amp;quot;]].&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:canvas.jpg|750px|The canvas of both schematic and layout view|none]]Image: The canvas of schematic and layout. More detailed see the [[Sidebar]] article.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
TARGET 3001! is able to handle up to 100 schematic pages within each project which you can browse. The maximum size of the sheets/boards is 1.2square meters or 47.24 square inches.  Open a second page in the schematic view by pressing the icon:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:SchemPage2.jpg|Open a second page|none]]Image: Open another page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Open a third page by pressing the 3 and so on. On which page you currently operate please see here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:ChngPge.jpg|The current page|none]]Image: The currently open page - It&#039;s the one you are working on.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1H]]&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039;on this left icon a dialog appears allowing the selection and naming of a different page. In case you are using more than one schematic page you can switch to the next one by the use of the &#039;&#039;&#039;[q]&#039;&#039;&#039; key or to the previous one by &#039;&#039;&#039;[Shift]+[Q]&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administration of schematic pages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;From version 14&#039;&#039;&#039; schematic pages can be administrated by the sidebar section &amp;quot;Schematic pages&amp;quot;. You can touch the bar (&#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1H]]&#039;&#039;&#039;) and pull it up and down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=0 cellpadding=10&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:page_0.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[image:page_0a.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[image: sidebars3_e_a.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A line represents a schematic page, a click on it allows editing it&#039;s name. You also can touch a line and drag it to a different position in the row.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SPseiten_drag_and_drop_e.jpg|Give a page a different position in the row by drag and drop|none]]Image: By drag and drop you can change positions of the pages in the row&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In TARGET 3001! versions younger than V13.3.0.62 the schematic pages are handled in Dialog &amp;quot;Settings/Names of schematic pages&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SchematicPages.jpg|thumb|500px|none|Administration of schematic pages]]Image: Handle pages by dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In versions older than V13.3.0.62 the administration of schematic pages is managed in the [[Hierarchy Browser]] (see on the left edge of screen for. Use [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M2&#039;&#039;&#039;]] and reach &amp;quot;Properties&amp;quot;. After selecting it, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_VerwSchaltplSHier.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In case you intend to shift the contents of Page 4 to page 5 [[Capture Window|highlight the complete schematic]] page by &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1H]]&#039;&#039;&#039;. Press &#039;&#039;&#039;[e]&#039;&#039;&#039; and enter the desired schematic page to the flashing dialog. This works in later versions as well:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PageNumber.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lead a signal to a second page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use a [[Reference Symbol]] or a [[bus]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  Spread a symbol over several schematic pages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to move symbols and wires from one schematic page to another is to select them, press [e] for edit and change their page number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ChgPgSymbWires.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please make sure that the coordinate space on the target page is free before letting the drawing fall into that page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Have a close look at the components which consist of several symbols: Do they still have the same component number? If not, they are parts of different ICs. Then delete each symbol with the higher component number and reinsert the right one. E.g. IC3a and IC3b belong together with IC15c and IC15d. Delete IC15c and insert IC3c at the same position using the menu option &amp;quot;Import Rests of Components&amp;quot; in menu &amp;quot;Components&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Go to page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SelectPage.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select another page to be viewed in a schematic window, by click on the icon representing the page currently active. Use [q] or [Shift]+[Q]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SelNewSchemPage.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Next/Previous Page (schematic) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use key &#039;&#039;&#039;[q]&#039;&#039;&#039; for changing to another schematic page, if you use more than one schematic pages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use keys &#039;&#039;&#039;[Shift]+[q]&#039;&#039;&#039; for changing to the previous page, if you use more than one schematic pages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bring an object to a new schematic page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; the entry &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Bring to new page&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; offers the following ption:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Auf_andere_Seite_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The desired object needs to be highlighted first.  At the edge of schematic page #1 there are reference symbols placed automatically. They can be displaced individually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Migrate a schematic page to another project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;A customer asks:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Is there any way to move the complete contents of a schematic page of project A to a page of project B without changing component numbers? I have tried copy/paste, selecting &amp;quot;All signals keep their names&amp;quot;, but the component numbers still move to empty spaces. I would have to do the same with the associated layout page.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;First, open both projects in the same TARGET. The menu item &amp;quot;Window&amp;quot; then helps with the organisation. Please catch the corresponding page with a catch window completely and make a [[Module|module]] out of it. With the current version of TARGET, the packages and the relevant tracks of the PCB then automatically get assigned to this module as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the clipboard to copy the layout view (PCB) of the module into the other project immediately after the schematic part of the module has been pasted. Keeping the numbering of the components (if not in row) does not work. TARGET always takes the next free number. Using the &amp;quot;Reorganisation&amp;quot; in menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; you may renumber the components of the new page afterwards.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reference symbols with pages of use ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A reference symbol can show on which other pages the signal appears. Please have a look here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reference symbols with pages]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Special: How to print a Din A3 schematic page on two Din A4 pages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print a Din A3 schematic page on two Din A4 pages please use an offset of the X-coordinates. Begin printing the left part of your drawing without offset using the following settings:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:dina3dina4_1.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open the Print dialog again and enter an &amp;quot;Offset X&amp;quot; at -210 mm (half the length of a Din A3 page = width of a Din A4 sheet). The drawing shifts left left according to the entered coordinates. In our example we choose a value of -181 mm for using the space as best as possible because the width of the drawing frame is a bit smaller.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:dina3dina4_2.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now print the right half of of the schematic. In the middle we will have a overlapping area. You may play a bit with the offset value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Schaltplanseite]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Feuille]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Actions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Page&amp;diff=28982</id>
		<title>Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Page&amp;diff=28982"/>
		<updated>2021-08-30T09:03:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Organise and handle schematic pages within the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Sidebar]]&#039;&#039;&#039; on the right edge of screen. In the sidebar please see section [[Sidebar#Section_Schematic_pages|&amp;quot;Schematic Page&amp;quot;]].&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:canvas.jpg|750px|The canvas of both schematic and layout view|none]]Image: The canvas of schematic and layout. More detailed see the [[Sidebar]] article.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
TARGET 3001! is able to handle up to 100 schematic pages within each project which you can browse. The maximum size of the sheets/boards is 1.2square meters or 47.24 square inches.  Open a second page in the schematic view by pressing the icon:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:SchemPage2.jpg|Open a second page|none]]Image: Open another page&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Open a third page by pressing the 3 and so on. On which page you currently operate please see here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:ChngPge.jpg|The current page|none]]Image: The currently open page - It&#039;s the one you are working on.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1H]]&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039;on this left icon a dialog appears allowing the selection and naming of a different page. In case you are using more than one schematic page you can switch to the next one by the use of the &#039;&#039;&#039;[q]&#039;&#039;&#039; key or to the previous one by &#039;&#039;&#039;[Shift]+[Q]&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administration of schematic pages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;From version 14&#039;&#039;&#039; schematic pages can be administrated by the sidebar section &amp;quot;Schematic pages&amp;quot;. You can touch the bar (&#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1H]]&#039;&#039;&#039;) and pull it up and down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=0 cellpadding=10&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:page_0.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[image:page_0a.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[image: sidebars3_e_a.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A line represents a schematic page, a click on it allows editing it&#039;s name. You also can touch a line and drag it to a different position in the row.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:SPseiten_drag_and_drop_e.jpg|Give a page a different position in the row by drag and drop|none]]Image: By drag and drop you can change positions of the pages in the row&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In TARGET 3001! versions younger than V13.3.0.62 the schematic pages are handled in Dialog &amp;quot;Settings/Names of schematic pages&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SchematicPages.jpg|thumb|500px|none|Administration of schematic pages]]Image: Handle pages by dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In versions older than V13.3.0.62 the administration of schematic pages is managed in the [[Hierarchy Browser]] (see on the left edge of screen for. Use [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M2&#039;&#039;&#039;]] and reach &amp;quot;Properties&amp;quot;. After selecting it, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_VerwSchaltplSHier.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In case you intend to shift the contents of Page 4 to page 5 [[Capture Window|highlight the complete schematic]] page by &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1H]]&#039;&#039;&#039;. Press &#039;&#039;&#039;[e]&#039;&#039;&#039; and enter the desired schematic page to the flashing dialog. This works in later versions as well:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PageNumber.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lead a signal to a second page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use a [[Reference Symbol]] or a [[bus]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==  Spread a symbol over several schematic pages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to move symbols and wires from one schematic page to another is to select them, press [e] for edit and change their page number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ChgPgSymbWires.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please make sure that the coordinate space on the target page is free before letting the drawing fall into that page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Have a close look at the components which consist of several symbols: Do they still have the same component number? If not, they are parts of different ICs. Then delete each symbol with the higher component number and reinsert the right one. E.g. IC3a and IC3b belong together with IC15c and IC15d. Delete IC15c and insert IC3c at the same position using the menu option &amp;quot;Import Rests of Components&amp;quot; in menu &amp;quot;Components&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Go to page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SelectPage.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select another page to be viewed in a schematic window, by click on the icon representing the page currently active. Use [q] or [Shift]+[Q]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SelNewSchemPage.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Next/Previous Page (schematic) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use key &#039;&#039;&#039;[q]&#039;&#039;&#039; for changing to another schematic page, if you use more than one schematic pages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use keys &#039;&#039;&#039;[Shift]+[q]&#039;&#039;&#039; for changing to the previous page, if you use more than one schematic pages.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bring an object to a new schematic page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; the entry &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Bring to new page&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; offers the following ption:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Auf_andere_Seite_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The desired object needs to be highlighted first.  At the edge of schematic page #1 there are reference symbols placed automatically. They can be displaced individually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Migrate a schematic page to another project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;A customer asks:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Is there any way to move the complete contents of a schematic page of project A to a page of project B without changing component numbers? I have tried copy/paste, selecting &amp;quot;All signals keep their names&amp;quot;, but the component numbers still move to empty spaces. If there is any other way to do this, it would be very good. However, I would have to do the same with the associated layout page.&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Response:&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;First, open both projects in the same TARGET. The menu item &amp;quot;Window&amp;quot; then helps with the organisation.&lt;br /&gt;
Please catch the corresponding page with a catch window completely and make a module out of it. With the current version of TARGET, the housings and the relevant tracks in the PCB are then automatically assigned to this module as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then use the clipboard to copy the circuit diagram view of the module into the other project and immediately afterwards the circuit board part of the module.&lt;br /&gt;
Keeping the numbering of the components does not work, TARGET always takes the next free number. Using the &amp;quot;Reorganisation&amp;quot; in the menu &amp;quot;File&amp;quot; you may renumber the components of the new page afterwards.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reference symbols with pages of use ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A reference symbol can show on which other pages the signal appears. Please have a look here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reference symbols with pages]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Special: How to print a Din A3 schematic page on two Din A4 pages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print a Din A3 schematic page on two Din A4 pages please use an offset of the X-coordinates. Begin printing the left part of your drawing without offset using the following settings:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:dina3dina4_1.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open the Print dialog again and enter an &amp;quot;Offset X&amp;quot; at -210 mm (half the length of a Din A3 page = width of a Din A4 sheet). The drawing shifts left left according to the entered coordinates. In our example we choose a value of -181 mm for using the space as best as possible because the width of the drawing frame is a bit smaller.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:dina3dina4_2.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now print the right half of of the schematic. In the middle we will have a overlapping area. You may play a bit with the offset value.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Schaltplanseite]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Feuille]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Actions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Signal_polygon&amp;diff=28981</id>
		<title>Signal polygon</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Signal_polygon&amp;diff=28981"/>
		<updated>2021-08-27T07:47:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;For the handling of polygons with a signal in V17, V16, V15... please have a look here: [[Freehand groundplane]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From TARGET V18 onwards, a ground plane is treated as a signal polygon and can be equipped with individual attributes. This means, every ground plane is a signal polygon, but not all signal polygons are automatically ground planes. Any number of signal polygons can be created on one copper side. A copper element is considered connected when its center touches the filled polygon.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode to draw a signal polygon:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*by keyboard key [6],&lt;br /&gt;
*by menu item &amp;quot;6 Draw ground polygon&amp;quot; in menu &amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*by icon [[Image:PolySignal.jpg]] among the drawing functions [[Image:Pen.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: signalpolygonicon.jpg|Icon]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Icon to be found in the layout view among the drawing functions&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Construction of a ground plane in TARGET =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ground plane (for example for the signal GND) in TARGET must be imagined as a set of three planes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the area layer, the contour of the ground plane is displayed as a filled polygon&lt;br /&gt;
*On the deletion layer the auras (= the safety distances to the non-GND signals) which pass through the ground plane are shown&lt;br /&gt;
*On the copper-layer the conductive tracks and all other conductive elements are .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tracks which do not carry the signal of the ground potential do not belong to the ground. They get an aura, a safety spacing, which is shown on the deletion layer. So they get separated from the ground. Tracks that belong to the ground plane do not have an aura. They get embedded to the ground plane and thus connect the ground plane to GND. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Masseflaeche_e.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Setup of a ground plane in TARGET&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very end of the layout work the ground plane contour of the area layer should be shifted to the copper layer together with the auras of the deletion layer. We say the signal polygon is filled or the computation in the copper layer is executed. So there are&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;two states of a ground plane: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;filled, computed&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not filled, not computed&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The advantage of the not computed state (a graphical area separation) is that any change to the ground plane is immediately visible on the screen without any loss of time. Therefore it is best to fill the ground plane only at the very end, when you go for production. Otherwise you maybe pour your set in copper too early and further layout work will be ponderous a bit. However, you can turn bsck a filled ground plane into the not computed state easily.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Old polygons found =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you open a project which had been created by a version V18 or older, the following dialog will appear:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:altepolygone_e.jpg|Old polygons found]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The dialog &amp;quot;Old polygons found&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What&#039;s behind it?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have created a project with a version V18 or older, the conversion of polygons might cause minor changes to the polygon surfaces (roundings, etc). The printed circuit board would then look slightly different than it appeared earlier. Therefore, PCB manufacturers should not carry out the conversion. However, the normal user should convert old polygons to new ones. The new polygons are easier to handle and more flexible than the old ones. It is preferable to compute the new polygon filling &#039;&#039;&#039;at the end of the design process&#039;&#039;&#039; and leave it in a primitive state, see the option &amp;quot;Compute filling&amp;quot; at the bottom of the following dialog. Then one can fade in/out each of the layers involved separately (&amp;quot;copper&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;deletion&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;area&amp;quot;) the same as in earlier versions. The functions &amp;quot;Check project&amp;quot; as well as the creation of Gerber data will fill the areas later anyway.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Use the entire PCB area =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:entire_PCB_area.jpg|Use the entire PCB area for a ground plane]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Use the entire PCB area for a ground plane&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create a partial ground plane area like a polygon =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If not the whole area of your PCB is to be used as ground plane but only a smaller area, this can be defined as signal polygon. Select the signal polygon function with the keyboard key &#039;&#039;&#039;[6]&#039;&#039;&#039; and set the corner points of the polygon with [[Conventions|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]. In the last polygon segment, press &#039;&#039;&#039;[Return]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Conventions|&#039;&#039;&#039;M2&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to end the polygon course exactly at the starting point. The dialog for editing the signal polygon opens immediately:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:massepolygondDLG_e.jpg|Dialog for signal polygon edition]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The dialog for signal polygon edition&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Polygon Info ==&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly self explanatory: Shows the number of corners, the perimeter and the surface area are either metric or imperial, depending on the unit set. The values cannot be edited here.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Layer == &lt;br /&gt;
A polygon with signal assignment can only be created on a copper layer. The copper layers used in your project can be selected from the drop down list. Select the copper layer upon which your polygon later shall appear (copper bottom, copper top, copper inside). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal ==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the signal to be assigned to the polygon. At this point you can only assign one signal to one polygon. Creating a [[Star shaped ground]] is a separate topic. Please have a look there.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Track width == &lt;br /&gt;
In easy words track width is the thickness of the pen which you use to fill the polygon with color. Sounds a bit childish but in respect to the production technique it is the best way to compare. In Gerber a photo pen follows the lines on a photosensitive board with an aperture according to the track width. The sharper the tip of the pen, the more filigree structures can be built. Discuss the smallest value with your PCB-house. Here in Europe the minimum value of 0.15 mm is common.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following picture shows the polygon with a little notch see arrow. The reason is a track width set too wide. The pen can not go through this bottle neck.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:signalpolygone_gap.jpg|Track width too big]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Track width too big to close the area at this spot.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring to the track width set here the DesignRuleCheck later checks whether the minimum track width od a connection is fulfilled. The track width must also be seen in combination with the &amp;quot;Grid spacing&amp;quot;. A gridded ground plane in consists of a net-structure made of orthogonal intersecting lines. The width of this lines you also define here. You can only enter one value for the track width here. The net structure (= ground plane in lines) always has a square mesh structure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== Grid spacing ==&lt;br /&gt;
A ground plane in lines offers production advantages in galvanization and also is preferable in respect to electromagnetic performance of the signal. In addition to the track width you can define the distance of the mesh, the grid spacing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:signalpolygone_grid.jpg|Ground plane in lines]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Copper top: Ground plane in lines (to the right). Track width: 0.3mm, Grid spacing: 0.5mm&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If the grid spacing gets too wide, the polygon will not be able to convey the signal any more. The limit is:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grid spacing &amp;gt; Minimum &#039;&#039;Drill hole diameter&#039;&#039; + 2 x &#039;&#039;Width of the rest copper concerning pads&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use the &amp;quot;Check project&amp;quot; routine or if you &amp;quot;Compute Air Wires (Ratsnest)&amp;quot; such a widely spaced polygon grid can not convey the signal which should run through it. So there will remain an air wire and the soldering pads in question need to be connected by a signal track manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following message could appear when using the &amp;quot;Check project routine&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Signal-Polygon too chunky: GND on layer 2...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:signalpolygon_grid_too_wide.jpg|Ground plane gridded too wide]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Copper top: The ground plane is gridded too wide. Please use a smaller grid.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PCB edge spacing ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is helpful to have a little spacing between ground plane and cutting edge of the PCB. It can avoid a short circuit by just touching the board by any other object. Also a crosstalk of the signal can be avoided. Define here how far you put back the edge of the ground plane from the edge of the board. Cutting edge of the board is middle of the PCB outline.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: signalpolygone_edge.jpg|Distance of the polygon to the cutting edge of the board]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Distance to the edge: left without, right with &amp;quot;stand back&amp;quot; from the edge of the board. In the image to the right the left polygon shows a PCB edge spacing of 0.8mm, the one right beside shows a spacing to the edge of 0.4mm.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rank ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Rang_u_Auren_e.jpg|Rank and Auras]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Section of the dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Polygons can overlap, they even can interlace - sure they never should touch each other. Which of the polygons should dominate the other (taking away some of the others shape) can be defined by its rank. The higher the cipher of the rank of a polygon is, the more dominant it is. A polygon with rank 2 dominates a polygon having only rank 1. This means the one with rank 2 takes away the overlapping from the one with rank 1 and so on. There are 99 ranks possible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: signalpolygonrang_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Copper bottom: Interlacing polygons with different signals and different ranks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The distance between the two surfaces is determined by the value of the &amp;quot;Spacing between single signals&amp;quot;, see default entry in the &amp;quot;Check project&amp;quot; dialog. Unless the individual entry for the &amp;quot;Minimum track spacing&amp;quot; of one of the signals (or their signal classes) would be set larger. Then this value would be used. So the higher value of both will be used to determine the gap.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust auras ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Rang_u_Auren_e.jpg|Rank and Auras]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Section of the dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you create a new signal polygon, the auras of the tracks, vias and pads touching the polygon or being inside the polygon will be adapted. If you later edit the auras manually, they will not be adjusted automatically when you refill the polygon unless you check the &amp;quot;Adjust auras&amp;quot; box. The following will happen:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*a different-signal pad/via gets isolated&lt;br /&gt;
*a same-signal pad gets a thermal&lt;br /&gt;
*solder pads without pad number get a thermal too&lt;br /&gt;
*a same-signal via will be completely embedded to the plane&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afterwards you can manually change the auras of the individual soldering pads and vias. TARGET will not propose to adjust the auras when recalculating the polygon. If you want to embed a pad completely, you can set its aura to zero later or use the field &amp;quot;No aura for these layers:&amp;quot; and list the corresponding copper layer(s). Then let the area (s) be refilled, i. e. the dialog &amp;quot;Edit signal polygon&amp;quot; needs to be opened again and the option &amp;quot;Fill directly (Execute computation in copper layer)&amp;quot; needs to be ticked. Vias never get automatic heat sinks. In general vias are always connected over their entire surface (= embedded). If the user later adds an aura to the via on the ground plane layer, it remains isolated in this ground plane, i. e. unconnected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create thermal pads ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Rang_u_Auren_e.jpg|Rank and Auras]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Section of the dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The soldering pad of a component lead having the same signal as the ground polygon, e. g. GND, should be fully embedded in order to connect as best as possible. However, too much heat would dissipate into the ground plane too quickly during soldering, so that the solder agens would not bond well with the copper. Better create a [[Thermal Pads|thermal pad]]. A thermal pad (heat sink, thermal) is a soldering pad which is surrounded by a safety spacing (aura) but connected to the ground plane by small bars only. This prevents the heat energy from dissipating into the plane too quickly when getting soldered. These automatic bars are cross-shaped to the pad.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== also for pads that are already connected ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the sub-option &amp;quot;also for pads that are already connected&amp;quot; is selected (default), then those soldering pads will get 4 ligaments (ridges) if possible, which were already connected to tracks manually or by the use of the autorouter. If this box is unchecked, no ligaments (ridges) will be created for all soldering pads from which a manually routed track starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The width of these automatic thermal ligaments from  V20.5.0.17 is:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*for drilled pads max 2/3 of the drill hole&lt;br /&gt;
*for SMDs max 2/3 of the thin side&lt;br /&gt;
*as least the filling width of the polygon&lt;br /&gt;
*at most the double of the filling width of the polygon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The width of the automatic thermal ligaments was before:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*at least as wide as the line width of the polygon (except for very narrow SMD pads, finepitch)&lt;br /&gt;
*maximum double the width of the fill lines of the polygon&lt;br /&gt;
*maximum width as the smaller side of the pad (pad height, pad width)&lt;br /&gt;
*maximum as wide as 2/3 of the larger side of the pad (pad height, pad width)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can connect these pads with wider tracks manually. Polygonal pads are not automatically connected with ligaments (=not automatically made thermals). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://office.ibfriedrich.com/EineFrageEN/t21/q1/question.html Why do those ligaments in thermal pads lead into empty space sometimes?]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: signalpolygone_thermal.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The pads numbered 1 of the two components being located to two polygons. Left with thermal pads, right without - thus embedded completely to the plane.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== also for vias ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TARGET will completely embed a via in the ground plane if it carries the same ground potential. Since a via is normally not soldered, there is no reason why this should not be the case. If you still want to equip your vias like a heat sink with aura and ligaments (ridges), you can check this box.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Suppress ligaments in thermals ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t like the ligaments, double-click the via and untick the ligaments-box in the dialog (underneath the PadStack button). Now you could set them manually as a simple copper rectangle furnished with the same signal.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: Stege_unterdruecken _e.jpg|Suppress ligaments in a certain thermal|none]]Image: Option (untick box) to actively suppress the creation of ligaments if the object comes out as a thermal.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete islands ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Rang_u_Auren_e.jpg|Rank and Auras]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Section of the dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A not connected piece of a signal polygon is called &amp;quot;island&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;orphan&amp;quot;. They dont have any purpose and often make trouble. So they should be removed. TARGET does this automatically if you tick the box. A ground plane gets connected by a pad of a component, a via having an aura of 0 upon this layer or a piece of track running through the polygon plane and having aura =0. Always the signal name (the signal) must be identical. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Compute filling ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: compute_filling.jpg|Compute filling]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Section of the dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Filling here means something like &amp;quot;copper pour&amp;quot;. It is when you merge the signal track structures and the ground area on the copper layer. TARGET then renders the complete structure of &amp;quot;Copper top&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Copper bottom&amp;quot; (or &amp;quot;Copper inside&amp;quot; if you have) including the ground plane. You can do it instantly (&amp;quot;Fill directly&amp;quot;) by confirming the dialog or you can leave the construction in an intermediate state (&amp;quot;Do not compute yet&amp;quot;) so that the signal polygon of the ground plane is defined like a primitive. It is kept in waiting position to be handled separately on the &amp;quot;Area&amp;quot;-layer. So the ground plane still can be adapted, moved and trated as you please.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fill directly (Execute computation in copper layer) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The polygon immediately gets created wit all interactions to all other elements upon the copper layer. It is displayed the way ist will be produced at the end. Any change in design requires the complete computation (rendering). This process can take some seconds in bigger projects. Therefore it might be better to use the option: &amp;quot;Do not compute yet (primitive state on area layer)&amp;quot; see below.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: groundpic_6.jpg|A double sided layout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Example of a double sided Layout, ground plane on copper top, filled directly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Do not compute yet (primitive state on area layer) ===&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this item, the ground plane at first is built up three-layered:&lt;br /&gt;
*Its shape on layer &amp;quot;Area&amp;quot;, it is the primitive of the ground plane&lt;br /&gt;
*The auras of all signals on layer &amp;quot;Deletion&amp;quot;, i. e. the spacings of all signals giving clearance to the ground potential (s).&lt;br /&gt;
*The tracks on layer &amp;quot;Copper&amp;quot;. All signal tracks including the ground signal (s) are displayed here.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: groundpic_1.jpg|A double sided layout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: A double sided layout&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: groundpic_2.jpg|Primitive of the ground plane]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The ground plane as a priitive created by keyboard key &#039;&#039;[6] Draw signal polygon&#039;&#039;. It is displayed on layer &amp;quot;14, Area top&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: groundpic_3.jpg|The auras]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The aura of each of the signals is displayed on layer &amp;quot;15, Deletion top&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: groundpic_4.jpg|The tracks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: DThe copper tracks on layer &amp;quot;16, Copper top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: groundpic_5.jpg|A double sided layout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: All three layers Copper, Deletion and Area are faded in, in addition layer &amp;quot;23, PCB Outline&amp;quot; (light red). The state still is  &amp;quot;Not yet computed&amp;quot;, because the three layers are still separate which means not yet &amp;quot;poured into copper&amp;quot;. Ticking the boxes to the right each fades them in, unticking fades them out.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Unfill an already filled (computed) ground plane =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Retrieve an already computed filled ground plane to the three levels copper, deletion and area by selecting the entry &amp;quot;Do not fill all polygons&amp;quot; in menu &#039;&#039;Actions/Ground planes&#039;&#039;. Now you can show, hide and edit the groundplane separately.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:groundpic_e.jpg|Recover ground plane|none]]Image: The ground plane is a triplet again&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Hide filling, show outline only =&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: compute_filling.jpg|Compute filling]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Section of the dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is for a better overview and easier grip of elements within the ground plane.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Show or hide polygons upon visible layers =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PolygoneEinAusblenden_e.jpg|Show and hide]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Show and hide polygons&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The key [&amp;gt;] fills polygons on visible layers. So they get visible, if area- and deletion layers before had been faded out. Apart from this they are just calculated new.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key [&amp;lt;] un- fills all polygons, shifts them to the area layer and fades out all area- and deletion layers. The polygons get faded out so to speak. Only the ligaments of thermal pads remain.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create a keep out area =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A keep out is an &amp;quot;area within a copper area&amp;quot; free of copper. Draw it in any shape (rectangle, trinagle, circle, normal polygon) into the deletion layer of the respective copper side. Maybe the &amp;quot;Fill directly&amp;quot; command for the signal polygon has to be executed again to have the keep out take effect.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: keepout.jpg|Creating a keep out]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Draw a keep out to the deletion layer: Select drawing mode, right click ([[M2]]) the desired layer in teh sidebar, draw the keep out area. &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(alias keepout, keep-out)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= List of polygons =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is an item in layout menu &amp;quot;Actions/Ground planes&amp;quot;. Several signal polygons in a project are clearly displayed in a list. All relevant properties of the signal polygons are visible at a glance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ListePolygone1_e.jpg|List of polygons]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: List of signal polygons with different properties in one project: Signal name, layer to appear on, line width of filling (=track width), grid spacing, distance to PCB edge and rank.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Rank 2 dominates rank 1, rank 3 dominates rank 2 and/or 1, and so on. When overlapping, the polygon with the higher rank digit takes away something from the polygon with the smaller rank digit. See &amp;quot;Copper top&amp;quot; (blue): The polygon on the left has rank digit 2, which is higher than the polygon on the right, having only rank digit 1. The red polygon has also rank digit 1, but this is irrelevant in this construction, as it is located on &amp;quot;Copper bottom&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking on the first line of the list displays the following screen:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ListePolygone2_e.jpg|Clicking  [[M11]] to a line of the list]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Clicking [[M11]] to a list entry zooms to the respective signal polygon and marks it. At the same time its dialog: &amp;quot;Edit signal polygon&amp;quot; opens for inspection/edition.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Text in a ground plane =  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Groundplane#Text_in_ground_plane|Text in ground plane]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Delete groundplane =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight groundplane by mouseclick [[M1]] and delete it by pressing the [Del] key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Attention when making changes after &amp;quot;filling&amp;quot;! =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you render the filling of a ground plane (execute the computation in copper layer, &amp;quot;fill&amp;quot;), this is done exactly representing the conditions that apply at the time of rendering. If you make changes to elements having an aura afterwards or change deletions or other parameters that will influence the area, then the area will have the wrong shape prior to the next rendering! Therefore, when checking the project or calculating the air wires and with each new output, the area always will be recalculated so that all current conditions are taken into account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately, the project can be saved in this inconsistent state before recalculation. When outputting data for manufacturing, the correct recalculation of all surfaces is then carried out, which can lead to differences. To make sure that the PCB looks on the screen as it will be produced, always run &amp;quot;Check Project&amp;quot; in menu &amp;quot;Actions/Check and test&amp;quot; as the last step before ordering.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
alias: freehand groundplane, customized ground, copper pour, copper fill &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Signal-Polygon]][[fr:polygone de signal]][[Category:Layout]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28980</id>
		<title>Insert a resistor in series as limiter afterwards</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28980"/>
		<updated>2021-08-25T14:45:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Simply drop the resistor onto the existing signal wire in the schematic. The hit signal will be ripped up in order to insert the resistor.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand1.jpg|none|Resistor imported and aligned]] Image: Resistor fetched from the component database and aligned. Click [[M1]] to &amp;quot;drop&amp;quot; (= place on the existing signal).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand2_e.jpg|none|Hinweis 1]] Image: Klick auf Ja liefert das folgende Bild:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand3_e.jpg|none|Hinweis 2]] Image: Der Signalname Sig$22 wird automatisch erzeugt. Welcher Signalstrang den Namen behält und welcher einen neuen Namen erhält ist unter anderem von seiner Länge abhängig. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand5_e.jpg|none|Hinweis 3]] Image: Hinweis zum weiteren Vorgehen im Layout. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leiterbahnen, die im Layout bereits verlegt waren, bleiben zunächst bestehen. Sie müssen von Hand aufgetrennt werden, soll das Gehäuse des Widerstandes eingesetzt werden. Der Signalteil Sig$22 müsste im Layout [[Signal umbenennen|von Hand umbenannt]] werden. Wenn die Leiterbahn nicht allzu kompliziert verlegt ist, löschen Sie den Leiterbanzug komplett und verlegen Sie sie neu. Das Pad des Gehäuses im Layout bringt den neuen Signalnamen automatisch mit, in unserem Fall Sig$22. Beim Neu-Verlegen der Leiterbahn würde dieser Signalname aufgenommen und eine neu verlegte Leiterbahn würde diesen Signalnamen tragen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand4.jpg|none|Widerstand platziert]] Image: Vorwiderstand in Reihe platziert (Schaltplan).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Vorwiderstand nachträglich einfügen]][[en:Insert a resistor in series as limiter afterwards]][[fr:Insérer ensuite une résistance en série]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Vorwiderstand5_e.jpg&amp;diff=28979</id>
		<title>File:Vorwiderstand5 e.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Vorwiderstand5_e.jpg&amp;diff=28979"/>
		<updated>2021-08-25T14:41:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Vorwiderstand3_e.jpg&amp;diff=28978</id>
		<title>File:Vorwiderstand3 e.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Vorwiderstand3_e.jpg&amp;diff=28978"/>
		<updated>2021-08-25T14:36:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Vorwiderstand2_e.jpg&amp;diff=28977</id>
		<title>File:Vorwiderstand2 e.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Vorwiderstand2_e.jpg&amp;diff=28977"/>
		<updated>2021-08-25T14:35:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28976</id>
		<title>Insert a resistor in series as limiter afterwards</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28976"/>
		<updated>2021-08-25T14:35:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Lassen sie den Widerstand einfach auf die bestehende Signal-Leitung fallen. Das getroffenen Signal wird aufgetrennt und der Widerstand eingefügt.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand1.jpg|none|Widerstand herein geholt und ausgerichtet]] Bild: Widerstand aus der Bauteildatenbank geholt und ausgerichtet. Mit Klick [[M1]] &amp;quot;fallen gelassen&amp;quot; (= auf dem bestehenden Signal platziert)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand2_e.jpg|none|Hinweis 1]] Bild: Klick auf Ja liefert das folgende Bild:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand3_e.jpg|none|Hinweis 2]] Bild: Der Signalname Sig$22 wird automatisch erzeugt. Welcher Signalstrang den Namen behält und welcher einen neuen Namen erhält ist unter anderem von seiner Länge abhängig. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand5_e.jpg|none|Hinweis 3]] Bild: Hinweis zum weiteren Vorgehen im Layout. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leiterbahnen, die im Layout bereits verlegt waren, bleiben zunächst bestehen. Sie müssen von Hand aufgetrennt werden, soll das Gehäuse des Widerstandes eingesetzt werden. Der Signalteil Sig$22 müsste im Layout [[Signal umbenennen|von Hand umbenannt]] werden. Wenn die Leiterbahn nicht allzu kompliziert verlegt ist, löschen Sie den Leiterbanzug komplett und verlegen Sie sie neu. Das Pad des Gehäuses im Layout bringt den neuen Signalnamen automatisch mit, in unserem Fall Sig$22. Beim Neu-Verlegen der Leiterbahn würde dieser Signalname aufgenommen und eine neu verlegte Leiterbahn würde diesen Signalnamen tragen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand4.jpg|none|Widerstand platziert]] Bild: Vorwiderstand in Reihe platziert (Schaltplan).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Vorwiderstand nachträglich einfügen]][[en:Insert a resistor in series as limiter afterwards]][[fr:Insérer ensuite une résistance en série]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Vorwiderstand4.jpg&amp;diff=28975</id>
		<title>File:Vorwiderstand4.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Vorwiderstand4.jpg&amp;diff=28975"/>
		<updated>2021-08-25T11:36:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Vorwiderstand1.jpg&amp;diff=28974</id>
		<title>File:Vorwiderstand1.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Vorwiderstand1.jpg&amp;diff=28974"/>
		<updated>2021-08-25T11:35:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28973</id>
		<title>Insert a resistor in series as limiter afterwards</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Insert_a_resistor_in_series_as_limiter_afterwards&amp;diff=28973"/>
		<updated>2021-08-25T11:31:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: Created page with &amp;quot;Lassen sie den Widerstand einfach auf die bestehende Signal-Leitung fallen. Das getroffenen Signal wird aufgetrennt und der Widerstand eingefügt.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  Image: Vorwiderst...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Lassen sie den Widerstand einfach auf die bestehende Signal-Leitung fallen. Das getroffenen Signal wird aufgetrennt und der Widerstand eingefügt.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand1.jpg|none|Widerstand herein geholt und ausgerichtet]] Bild: Widerstand aus der Bauteildatenbank geholt und ausgerichtet. Mit Klick [[M1]] &amp;quot;fallen gelassen&amp;quot; (= auf dem bestehenden Signal platziert)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand2.jpg|none|Hinweis 1]] Bild: Klick auf Ja liefert das folgende Bild:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand3.jpg|none|Hinweis 2]] Bild: Der Signalname Sig$22 wird automatisch erzeugt. Welcher Signalstrang den Namen behält und welcher einen neuen Namen erhält ist unter anderem von seiner Länge abhängig. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand5.jpg|none|Hinweis 3]] Bild: Hinweis zum weiteren Vorgehen im Layout. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leiterbahnen, die im Layout bereits verlegt waren, bleiben zunächst bestehen. Sie müssen von Hand aufgetrennt werden, soll das Gehäuse des Widerstandes eingesetzt werden. Der Signalteil Sig$22 müsste im Layout [[Signal umbenennen|von Hand umbenannt]] werden. Wenn die Leiterbahn nicht allzu kompliziert verlegt ist, löschen Sie den Leiterbanzug komplett und verlegen Sie sie neu. Das Pad des Gehäuses im Layout bringt den neuen Signalnamen automatisch mit, in unserem Fall Sig$22. Beim Neu-Verlegen der Leiterbahn würde dieser Signalname aufgenommen und eine neu verlegte Leiterbahn würde diesen Signalnamen tragen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Vorwiderstand4.jpg|none|Widerstand platziert]] Bild: Vorwiderstand in Reihe platziert (Schaltplan).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Vorwiderstand nachträglich einfügen]][[en:Insert a resistor in series as limiter afterwards]][[fr:Insérer ensuite une résistance en série]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=3D_View&amp;diff=28972</id>
		<title>3D View</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=3D_View&amp;diff=28972"/>
		<updated>2021-08-24T12:02:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:3d.png|600px|alt=3D-Ansicht]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;!--[[File:3Dview.png|alt=&amp;quot;3D View&amp;quot;]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[TARGET 3001!]] allows to inspect your [[layout]]s in [[3D|3D View]].  Fly through your TARGET-Layout and inspect the layout elements from all sides. By the use of the STEP 3D export you will be able to print your &amp;quot;assembled&amp;quot; board physically in 3D prior to real assembly. &lt;br /&gt;
To see what you have created, click in layout menu [[Menu View|&amp;quot;View&amp;quot;]] on &amp;quot;3D view&amp;quot; or simply click button:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:3D_button_DEF.jpg|Start 3D view]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[3D in general]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[3D Syntax]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Creation of a 3D model]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Modification of a 3D model]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[IDF Export]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Precondition is, that a [[component]] has a 3D-model. Most packages in TARGET 3001! are furnished with 3D models.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Minimum requirements for 3D view ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a 3D representation of a component the properties at least need a height information (COMPONENT_HEIGHT). This simply pulls the floor plan upwards (extrudes it) so that a solid is created. We also call this an &amp;quot;extruded polygon&amp;quot;. All components in TARGET by default have a minimum height of two millimetres, unless they already have the correct height according to the data sheet. Even if you want to add a 3D model to a component, you will first be asked if you want to create a simple &amp;quot;extruded polygon&amp;quot;:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Extrudiertes_polygon1_e.jpg|none]]Image: Right click [[M2]] on the area of the 3D image gives opportunity to edit the 3D Model. First you get asked whether you&#039;d like to have a simple extruded polygon created. If you say yes, the following image shows what you will get:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Extrudiertes_polygon2_e.jpg|none]]Image: Extruded polygon. Double click on the line defines the height of the extrusion.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following images will give an impression on the usability of the 3D function in TARGET 3001!:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The layout:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:3d_layout.jpg|none]][[Media:Pic.T3001|Download TARGET 3001! example project Pic.T3001]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;The 3D-View;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[image:3d_image.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The 3D window ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the above-mentioned 3D-button is pressed, the following dialogue window opens. It grants various variants of the view:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:3D_dialog1_e.jpg|Dialog window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: [[M2]] means right click in free space to open a context menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:3D_dialog2_e.jpg|Dialog window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: [[M1]] means left click on button: Standard orientation (central position) of the image.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[M2]] on the button enables alignment of the 3D-view by hand&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:3D_dialog3_e.jpg|Dialog window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Adjust zoom distance or rotation in space by hand.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the column to the left check boxes to show or hide individual signals, packages etc. You also might highlight them in color. Components being switched invisible will also be omitted from the STEP output.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Buttons in the top line allow an export to the formats STEP, OBJ and POV-Ray.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a 3D print == &lt;br /&gt;
You can print your PCB (as a dummy) before the actual production with a 3D printer, assembled or unassembled. 3D data can be imported and exported in STEP format. A transfer of your TARGET project in *.idf is possible as well. Furthermore, the OBJ format and the PovRay format are available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border =0 cellpadding=10&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:pic3dfdm.jpg]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[STEP 3D Export|Export to 3D format STEP]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[IDF Export|Export to 3D format IDF]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:3d_print_bleu.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Plastic [[3D dummy]] in FDM technique&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Precondition is that each component has a 3D model. You can very easily assign 3D models you have created yourself to your components. You will find step-by-step instructions in the articles mentioned above. If you want to create a new package with a 3D model quickly, the [[Package generator]] is suitable.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image:3d-print.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: A 3D print of the above project. &#039;&#039;&#039;[[3D dummy|How much is it??]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:automatic functions]][[category:Homepage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:3D-Ansicht]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Avis 3D]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=MySQL&amp;diff=28971</id>
		<title>MySQL</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=MySQL&amp;diff=28971"/>
		<updated>2021-08-23T12:08:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* Does MariaDB also work instead of MySQL? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image: mysqlight.png|SQLiteMySQL|right]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Have a look at the article [[Component database]] as well.&lt;br /&gt;
== MySQL: The powerful database for TARGET 3001! multiuser ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are in a network with multiple workstations and want to use one common TARGET 3001! component database you will need to have the components stored in a &#039;&#039;&#039;MySQL database.&#039;&#039;&#039; The SQLite database being pre installed with TARGET 3001! performs in multi user situations with normal transfer rates very slowly though in standalone mode in our experience the SQLite database is in the lead.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Note: Please use  MySQL version 5.1.12 to 5.7.  The use of tools like &amp;quot;MySQL Workbench&amp;quot; may cause problems.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Download MySQL ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/mysql/ http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/mysql/]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Install a MySQL server ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the SQLite database works with only one DLL and one single database file, a MySQL database needs a MySQL server. This should preferably be installed on a separate server within the network or as an auxiliary on one of the workstations. The server has always to be on power if a client in the network wants to use TARGET 3001!.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically you will ask your system administrator to set up a MySQL server. Linux as well as Windows computers are suitable to run such a MySQL server. You will find several tutorials in the Internet to install MySQL to the various systems:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.google.de/#hl=en&amp;amp;q=mysql-server+installation+tutorial Google: MySQL installation]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Set up / adapt a MySQL server and insert a TARGET 3001! data base ==&lt;br /&gt;
You have two options:&lt;br /&gt;
* Use a console (recommended)&lt;br /&gt;
* Use a browser application, e. g. phpMyAdmin (not recommended. Your server might be occupied up to 2 hours.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: User names ans passwords must not have more than 16 characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using a console ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Set up, adapt&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please set the following options to configure the server so that TARGET 3001! can access to the database correctly:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [mysqld]&lt;br /&gt;
 thread_stack = 256K&lt;br /&gt;
 query_cache_size = 32M     #query_cache_size ist ab MySQL 5.7.20 deprecated, also hinfällig&lt;br /&gt;
 #bind-address = 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
 bind-address = 0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
 max_allowed_packet=2M&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 [mysql]&lt;br /&gt;
 max_allowed_packet=2M&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Linux configuration file is named &amp;quot;my.cnf&amp;quot;, the Windows configuration file &amp;quot;my.ini&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Insert the initial TARGET 3001! database&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to insert the initial TARGET 3001! component database to the MySQL server, you need a DUMP file of the database and a brief script file for the import. Whether you have a Linux or a Windows system, different scripts need to be started. Following the link please find a zip file containing all you need:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/mysql/mysql_target3001db.zip Dump and scripts]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each script needs to be adapted according to the number of users. The MySQL server is setup after that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using phpMyAdmin or similar ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following section explains how to install the MySQL-DB target3001db with a browser application in order to administrate MySQL-databases (e.g. phpMyAdmin).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dump import can take up to two hours. You should use the console (s. 4) not to block the server for too long time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your application you may enter the SQL-commands as text or by menus and dialogs. In terms of common understanding we denote the commands here as text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The database target3001db etc.:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- Create User 1, furnish him with rights needed  *** if needed replace target3001user1 and target3001user1_password ***&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 GRANT USAGE ON *.* TO &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;@&#039;%&#039; IDENTIFIED BY &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user1_password&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
 GRANT SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, CREATE, DROP, INDEX, ALTER, CREATE TEMPORARY TABLES, EXECUTE, CREATE ROUTINE,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ALTER ROUTINE, TRIGGER ON target3001db.* TO &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;@&#039;%&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- Create User 2, furnish him with rights needed  *** if needed replace  target3001user2 and target3001user2_password ***&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 GRANT USAGE ON *.* TO &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;@&#039;%&#039; IDENTIFIED BY &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user2_password&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
 GRANT SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, CREATE, DROP, INDEX, ALTER, CREATE TEMPORARY TABLES, EXECUTE, CREATE ROUTINE,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ALTER ROUTINE, TRIGGER ON target3001db.* TO &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;@&#039;%&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- further User&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- create database&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 CREATE DATABASE target3001db CHARACTER SET utf8 COLLATE utf8_general_ci;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- modify variables&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- To change a global variable you need the permission SUPER.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SHOW VARIABLES LIKE &#039;thread_stack&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- if smaller than 256K, then:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  SET GLOBAL thread_stack = 256K;&lt;br /&gt;
 SHOW VARIABLES LIKE &#039;query_cache_size&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- if smaller than 32M, then:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  SET GLOBAL query_cache_size = 32M;&lt;br /&gt;
 SHOW VARIABLES LIKE &#039;max_allowed_packet&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- if smaller than 2M, then:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  SET GLOBAL max_allowed_packet = 2M;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Now the DB-Dump is going to be imported without components (empty3001db.sql):&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not the whole dump with components at once! Remember the db has over 60MB but unfortunately the dump import always is limited, see image. Example phpMyAdmin:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: dumpimport_e.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/mysql/mysql_target3001db_empty.zip Download the Dump here.]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TARGET 3001! Online DB Update:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Update the component database|Load all components etc. from our server]]. The download only takes a few seconds but the dump import would take up to two hours. Your server/network would be charged accordingly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Particularity for Windows server ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required for Windows server (with console):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $ mysql -u root -p&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 or without password: $ mysql -u root&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 mysql&amp;gt; use mysql&lt;br /&gt;
 mysql&amp;gt; GRANT ALL ON *.* to root@&#039;%&#039; IDENTIFIED BY &#039;&amp;lt;your-mysql-root-password&amp;gt;&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
 mysql&amp;gt; FLUSH PRIVILEGES;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These setting you can also do with phpMyAdmin or the workbench.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting up a MySQL client in TARGET 3001! ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the same directory as the TARGET 3001! program you will find a file called &amp;quot;libmysql.dll&amp;quot;. It represents the client driver to connect to the MySQL server. In TARGET 3001! itself you need to enter few things in order to get response from the MySQL server:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open an new project and press function key [F2] to open the component browser. At the end of the top menu line you will see that you are still connected to the SQLite database:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:mysql1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Component browser, migration) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Now click on the menu entry &amp;quot;[ connected with ... ]&amp;quot;. In the opening menu choose option &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot;. Now enter the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Start TARGET 3001! using MySQL database (enter &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL Server (name or IP of your MySQL server)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL User (your user name for the MySQL server)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL Password (your respective password)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL SSH Key (if SSH is used: SSH key file)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL SSH Cert (if SSH is used: certificate file)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL SSH CA (if SSH is used: certificate authority file)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple users can use the same MySQL user name.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Insert your customized components (migration) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already created your own USER components in SQLite (target3001.db), you can import them &#039;&#039;&#039;once only&#039;&#039;&#039; from your TARGET 3001! version to the bare database provided by IBF. All component IDs and custom component types and so on remain the same in the database. We call this action &amp;quot;migration&amp;quot;. Select the most important SQLite database from one of the several workstations. Further components from the other users can be added later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First use menu &amp;quot;[connected with...]&amp;quot; in order to switch to the MySQL database. In this menu select &amp;quot;Migration from SQLite to MySQL&amp;quot;. Then enter this most important SQLite database target3001.db, which shall be migrated to MySQL. So the easiest way to perform the migration, is to do it on the computer with that most important SQLite database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now all clients will have access to the MySQL database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Does MariaDB also work instead of MySQL? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://office.ibfriedrich.com/EineFrageEN/t31/q6/question.html Here] there is a tip from a customer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:MySQL]][[fr:MySQL]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=MySQL&amp;diff=28970</id>
		<title>MySQL</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=MySQL&amp;diff=28970"/>
		<updated>2021-08-23T11:59:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* Does MariaDB also work instead of MySQL? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image: mysqlight.png|SQLiteMySQL|right]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Have a look at the article [[Component database]] as well.&lt;br /&gt;
== MySQL: The powerful database for TARGET 3001! multiuser ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are in a network with multiple workstations and want to use one common TARGET 3001! component database you will need to have the components stored in a &#039;&#039;&#039;MySQL database.&#039;&#039;&#039; The SQLite database being pre installed with TARGET 3001! performs in multi user situations with normal transfer rates very slowly though in standalone mode in our experience the SQLite database is in the lead.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Note: Please use  MySQL version 5.1.12 to 5.7.  The use of tools like &amp;quot;MySQL Workbench&amp;quot; may cause problems.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Download MySQL ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/mysql/ http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/mysql/]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Install a MySQL server ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the SQLite database works with only one DLL and one single database file, a MySQL database needs a MySQL server. This should preferably be installed on a separate server within the network or as an auxiliary on one of the workstations. The server has always to be on power if a client in the network wants to use TARGET 3001!.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically you will ask your system administrator to set up a MySQL server. Linux as well as Windows computers are suitable to run such a MySQL server. You will find several tutorials in the Internet to install MySQL to the various systems:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.google.de/#hl=en&amp;amp;q=mysql-server+installation+tutorial Google: MySQL installation]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Set up / adapt a MySQL server and insert a TARGET 3001! data base ==&lt;br /&gt;
You have two options:&lt;br /&gt;
* Use a console (recommended)&lt;br /&gt;
* Use a browser application, e. g. phpMyAdmin (not recommended. Your server might be occupied up to 2 hours.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: User names ans passwords must not have more than 16 characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using a console ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Set up, adapt&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please set the following options to configure the server so that TARGET 3001! can access to the database correctly:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [mysqld]&lt;br /&gt;
 thread_stack = 256K&lt;br /&gt;
 query_cache_size = 32M     #query_cache_size ist ab MySQL 5.7.20 deprecated, also hinfällig&lt;br /&gt;
 #bind-address = 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
 bind-address = 0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
 max_allowed_packet=2M&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 [mysql]&lt;br /&gt;
 max_allowed_packet=2M&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Linux configuration file is named &amp;quot;my.cnf&amp;quot;, the Windows configuration file &amp;quot;my.ini&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Insert the initial TARGET 3001! database&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to insert the initial TARGET 3001! component database to the MySQL server, you need a DUMP file of the database and a brief script file for the import. Whether you have a Linux or a Windows system, different scripts need to be started. Following the link please find a zip file containing all you need:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/mysql/mysql_target3001db.zip Dump and scripts]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each script needs to be adapted according to the number of users. The MySQL server is setup after that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using phpMyAdmin or similar ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following section explains how to install the MySQL-DB target3001db with a browser application in order to administrate MySQL-databases (e.g. phpMyAdmin).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dump import can take up to two hours. You should use the console (s. 4) not to block the server for too long time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your application you may enter the SQL-commands as text or by menus and dialogs. In terms of common understanding we denote the commands here as text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The database target3001db etc.:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- Create User 1, furnish him with rights needed  *** if needed replace target3001user1 and target3001user1_password ***&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 GRANT USAGE ON *.* TO &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;@&#039;%&#039; IDENTIFIED BY &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user1_password&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
 GRANT SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, CREATE, DROP, INDEX, ALTER, CREATE TEMPORARY TABLES, EXECUTE, CREATE ROUTINE,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ALTER ROUTINE, TRIGGER ON target3001db.* TO &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;@&#039;%&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- Create User 2, furnish him with rights needed  *** if needed replace  target3001user2 and target3001user2_password ***&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 GRANT USAGE ON *.* TO &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;@&#039;%&#039; IDENTIFIED BY &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user2_password&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
 GRANT SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, CREATE, DROP, INDEX, ALTER, CREATE TEMPORARY TABLES, EXECUTE, CREATE ROUTINE,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ALTER ROUTINE, TRIGGER ON target3001db.* TO &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;@&#039;%&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- further User&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- create database&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 CREATE DATABASE target3001db CHARACTER SET utf8 COLLATE utf8_general_ci;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- modify variables&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- To change a global variable you need the permission SUPER.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SHOW VARIABLES LIKE &#039;thread_stack&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- if smaller than 256K, then:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  SET GLOBAL thread_stack = 256K;&lt;br /&gt;
 SHOW VARIABLES LIKE &#039;query_cache_size&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- if smaller than 32M, then:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  SET GLOBAL query_cache_size = 32M;&lt;br /&gt;
 SHOW VARIABLES LIKE &#039;max_allowed_packet&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- if smaller than 2M, then:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  SET GLOBAL max_allowed_packet = 2M;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Now the DB-Dump is going to be imported without components (empty3001db.sql):&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not the whole dump with components at once! Remember the db has over 60MB but unfortunately the dump import always is limited, see image. Example phpMyAdmin:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: dumpimport_e.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/mysql/mysql_target3001db_empty.zip Download the Dump here.]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TARGET 3001! Online DB Update:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Update the component database|Load all components etc. from our server]]. The download only takes a few seconds but the dump import would take up to two hours. Your server/network would be charged accordingly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Particularity for Windows server ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required for Windows server (with console):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $ mysql -u root -p&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 or without password: $ mysql -u root&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 mysql&amp;gt; use mysql&lt;br /&gt;
 mysql&amp;gt; GRANT ALL ON *.* to root@&#039;%&#039; IDENTIFIED BY &#039;&amp;lt;your-mysql-root-password&amp;gt;&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
 mysql&amp;gt; FLUSH PRIVILEGES;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These setting you can also do with phpMyAdmin or the workbench.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting up a MySQL client in TARGET 3001! ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the same directory as the TARGET 3001! program you will find a file called &amp;quot;libmysql.dll&amp;quot;. It represents the client driver to connect to the MySQL server. In TARGET 3001! itself you need to enter few things in order to get response from the MySQL server:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open an new project and press function key [F2] to open the component browser. At the end of the top menu line you will see that you are still connected to the SQLite database:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:mysql1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Component browser, migration) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Now click on the menu entry &amp;quot;[ connected with ... ]&amp;quot;. In the opening menu choose option &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot;. Now enter the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Start TARGET 3001! using MySQL database (enter &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL Server (name or IP of your MySQL server)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL User (your user name for the MySQL server)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL Password (your respective password)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL SSH Key (if SSH is used: SSH key file)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL SSH Cert (if SSH is used: certificate file)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL SSH CA (if SSH is used: certificate authority file)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple users can use the same MySQL user name.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Insert your customized components (migration) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already created your own USER components in SQLite (target3001.db), you can import them &#039;&#039;&#039;once only&#039;&#039;&#039; from your TARGET 3001! version to the bare database provided by IBF. All component IDs and custom component types and so on remain the same in the database. We call this action &amp;quot;migration&amp;quot;. Select the most important SQLite database from one of the several workstations. Further components from the other users can be added later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First use menu &amp;quot;[connected with...]&amp;quot; in order to switch to the MySQL database. In this menu select &amp;quot;Migration from SQLite to MySQL&amp;quot;. Then enter this most important SQLite database target3001.db, which shall be migrated to MySQL. So the easiest way to perform the migration, is to do it on the computer with that most important SQLite database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now all clients will have access to the MySQL database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Does MariaDB also work instead of MySQL? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://office.ibfriedrich.com/EineFrageEN/t31/q6/question.html Here] there is a tip from a customer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:MySQL]][[fr:MySQL]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:MySQL]][[fr:MySQL]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=MySQL&amp;diff=28969</id>
		<title>MySQL</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=MySQL&amp;diff=28969"/>
		<updated>2021-08-23T11:41:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[image: mysqlight.png|SQLiteMySQL|right]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Have a look at the article [[Component database]] as well.&lt;br /&gt;
== MySQL: The powerful database for TARGET 3001! multiuser ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are in a network with multiple workstations and want to use one common TARGET 3001! component database you will need to have the components stored in a &#039;&#039;&#039;MySQL database.&#039;&#039;&#039; The SQLite database being pre installed with TARGET 3001! performs in multi user situations with normal transfer rates very slowly though in standalone mode in our experience the SQLite database is in the lead.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Note: Please use  MySQL version 5.1.12 to 5.7.  The use of tools like &amp;quot;MySQL Workbench&amp;quot; may cause problems.&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Download MySQL ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/mysql/ http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/mysql/]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Install a MySQL server ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the SQLite database works with only one DLL and one single database file, a MySQL database needs a MySQL server. This should preferably be installed on a separate server within the network or as an auxiliary on one of the workstations. The server has always to be on power if a client in the network wants to use TARGET 3001!.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically you will ask your system administrator to set up a MySQL server. Linux as well as Windows computers are suitable to run such a MySQL server. You will find several tutorials in the Internet to install MySQL to the various systems:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.google.de/#hl=en&amp;amp;q=mysql-server+installation+tutorial Google: MySQL installation]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Set up / adapt a MySQL server and insert a TARGET 3001! data base ==&lt;br /&gt;
You have two options:&lt;br /&gt;
* Use a console (recommended)&lt;br /&gt;
* Use a browser application, e. g. phpMyAdmin (not recommended. Your server might be occupied up to 2 hours.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: User names ans passwords must not have more than 16 characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using a console ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Set up, adapt&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please set the following options to configure the server so that TARGET 3001! can access to the database correctly:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [mysqld]&lt;br /&gt;
 thread_stack = 256K&lt;br /&gt;
 query_cache_size = 32M     #query_cache_size ist ab MySQL 5.7.20 deprecated, also hinfällig&lt;br /&gt;
 #bind-address = 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;
 bind-address = 0.0.0.0&lt;br /&gt;
 max_allowed_packet=2M&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 [mysql]&lt;br /&gt;
 max_allowed_packet=2M&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Linux configuration file is named &amp;quot;my.cnf&amp;quot;, the Windows configuration file &amp;quot;my.ini&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Insert the initial TARGET 3001! database&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to insert the initial TARGET 3001! component database to the MySQL server, you need a DUMP file of the database and a brief script file for the import. Whether you have a Linux or a Windows system, different scripts need to be started. Following the link please find a zip file containing all you need:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/mysql/mysql_target3001db.zip Dump and scripts]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each script needs to be adapted according to the number of users. The MySQL server is setup after that.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using phpMyAdmin or similar ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following section explains how to install the MySQL-DB target3001db with a browser application in order to administrate MySQL-databases (e.g. phpMyAdmin).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dump import can take up to two hours. You should use the console (s. 4) not to block the server for too long time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your application you may enter the SQL-commands as text or by menus and dialogs. In terms of common understanding we denote the commands here as text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;The database target3001db etc.:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- Create User 1, furnish him with rights needed  *** if needed replace target3001user1 and target3001user1_password ***&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 GRANT USAGE ON *.* TO &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;@&#039;%&#039; IDENTIFIED BY &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user1_password&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
 GRANT SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, CREATE, DROP, INDEX, ALTER, CREATE TEMPORARY TABLES, EXECUTE, CREATE ROUTINE,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ALTER ROUTINE, TRIGGER ON target3001db.* TO &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;@&#039;%&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- Create User 2, furnish him with rights needed  *** if needed replace  target3001user2 and target3001user2_password ***&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 GRANT USAGE ON *.* TO &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;@&#039;%&#039; IDENTIFIED BY &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user2_password&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
 GRANT SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, CREATE, DROP, INDEX, ALTER, CREATE TEMPORARY TABLES, EXECUTE, CREATE ROUTINE,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ALTER ROUTINE, TRIGGER ON target3001db.* TO &#039;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #FF0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;target3001user2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&#039;@&#039;%&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- further User&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- create database&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 CREATE DATABASE target3001db CHARACTER SET utf8 COLLATE utf8_general_ci;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- modify variables&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- To change a global variable you need the permission SUPER.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 SHOW VARIABLES LIKE &#039;thread_stack&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- if smaller than 256K, then:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  SET GLOBAL thread_stack = 256K;&lt;br /&gt;
 SHOW VARIABLES LIKE &#039;query_cache_size&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- if smaller than 32M, then:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  SET GLOBAL query_cache_size = 32M;&lt;br /&gt;
 SHOW VARIABLES LIKE &#039;max_allowed_packet&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: #00AA00;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;-- if smaller than 2M, then:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  SET GLOBAL max_allowed_packet = 2M;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Now the DB-Dump is going to be imported without components (empty3001db.sql):&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not the whole dump with components at once! Remember the db has over 60MB but unfortunately the dump import always is limited, see image. Example phpMyAdmin:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: dumpimport_e.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/mysql/mysql_target3001db_empty.zip Download the Dump here.]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;TARGET 3001! Online DB Update:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Update the component database|Load all components etc. from our server]]. The download only takes a few seconds but the dump import would take up to two hours. Your server/network would be charged accordingly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Particularity for Windows server ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Required for Windows server (with console):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $ mysql -u root -p&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 or without password: $ mysql -u root&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 mysql&amp;gt; use mysql&lt;br /&gt;
 mysql&amp;gt; GRANT ALL ON *.* to root@&#039;%&#039; IDENTIFIED BY &#039;&amp;lt;your-mysql-root-password&amp;gt;&#039;;&lt;br /&gt;
 mysql&amp;gt; FLUSH PRIVILEGES;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These setting you can also do with phpMyAdmin or the workbench.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting up a MySQL client in TARGET 3001! ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the same directory as the TARGET 3001! program you will find a file called &amp;quot;libmysql.dll&amp;quot;. It represents the client driver to connect to the MySQL server. In TARGET 3001! itself you need to enter few things in order to get response from the MySQL server:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open an new project and press function key [F2] to open the component browser. At the end of the top menu line you will see that you are still connected to the SQLite database:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:mysql1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Component browser, migration) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Now click on the menu entry &amp;quot;[ connected with ... ]&amp;quot;. In the opening menu choose option &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot;. Now enter the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Start TARGET 3001! using MySQL database (enter &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL Server (name or IP of your MySQL server)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL User (your user name for the MySQL server)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL Password (your respective password)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL SSH Key (if SSH is used: SSH key file)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL SSH Cert (if SSH is used: certificate file)&lt;br /&gt;
 MySQL SSH CA (if SSH is used: certificate authority file)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple users can use the same MySQL user name.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Insert your customized components (migration) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already created your own USER components in SQLite (target3001.db), you can import them &#039;&#039;&#039;once only&#039;&#039;&#039; from your TARGET 3001! version to the bare database provided by IBF. All component IDs and custom component types and so on remain the same in the database. We call this action &amp;quot;migration&amp;quot;. Select the most important SQLite database from one of the several workstations. Further components from the other users can be added later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First use menu &amp;quot;[connected with...]&amp;quot; in order to switch to the MySQL database. In this menu select &amp;quot;Migration from SQLite to MySQL&amp;quot;. Then enter this most important SQLite database target3001.db, which shall be migrated to MySQL. So the easiest way to perform the migration, is to do it on the computer with that most important SQLite database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now all clients will have access to the MySQL database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Does MariaDB also work instead of MySQL? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://office.ibfriedrich.com/EineFrageDE/t31/q6/question.html Here] there is a tip from a customer.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:MySQL]][[fr:MySQL]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:MySQL]][[fr:MySQL]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Electra&amp;diff=28968</id>
		<title>Electra</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Electra&amp;diff=28968"/>
		<updated>2021-08-12T14:25:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* ELECTRA Update */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electracolor200.png|Electra Shape based Autorouter|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Shape Based PCB Autorouter&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Preface&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TARGET 3001! contains two internal autorouters, the [[Contour Autorouter]] and the [[Hybrid Autorouter]]. Additionally an interface for &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA&#039;&#039;&#039;, a powerful external autorouter can instantly be used in every TARGET 3001! edition. Fully licensed ELECTRA versions can separately be purchased, prices see below. ELECTRA is suitable for the more advanced and complex projects. It is working very quickly and reaches high completion rates. ELECTRA is a product of Konekt SPRL, Belgium,  [http://konekt.com/c5/index.php www.konekt.com]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[Image:videoicon.png]] &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[https://server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/electra/Electra_e.mp4 &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA video&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt; &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(mute)]&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra4layout.png|thumb|750px|none|A complex layout being autorouted with ELECTRA]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to start ELECTRA in TARGET 3001!? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install ELECTRA to a directory of your choice. Open TARGET 3001! and open layout menu:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Actions/Automatisms and assistants/Autorouter/ELECTRA auto router... [Ctrl]+[R]&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Electra_menu_0.jpg|ELECTRA menu path]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dialog &amp;quot;External Autorouter&amp;quot;. Open the TAB &#039;&#039;&#039;Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;. Please find the line to enter the path to the Electra.exe beneath: External router, program file: Click the button with the drop down arrow in order to open your Windows browser.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electrapfad_e.jpg|ELECTRA folder path]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can have the electra.exe in any directory of your choice. You only need to point TARGET there by entering the path to this line.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;If you purchase a license by us, you always will receive the latest version.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V8&#039;&#039;&#039; (current main version) ==&lt;br /&gt;
v8.05 (Sept 2020)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://konekt.com/doc/Electra_v8.pdf Info about V8 (PDF)]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Routing engine has a new push and shove routing pass that is now applied automatically on highly congested boards to resolve spacing violations more quickly than by rerouting nets. This improves performance and completion rate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Multi-Routing strategy providing an easy method to define and run multiple routing strategies within the same session.&lt;br /&gt;
*Advanced Routing strategy, use TCL with DO file extensions to control the strategy with for_loop, if statement, etc…&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V7&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
v7.00 (Jan 2018)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*User defined &amp;quot;from-to&amp;quot; for redefining the net topology&lt;br /&gt;
*New general purpose single layer no-via router&lt;br /&gt;
*Controlled flow to route decoupling capacitor with tracks and the rest with via to planes&lt;br /&gt;
*New “gloss” command to review existing routes to remove extra bends and redundant vias without rerouting like “clean”&lt;br /&gt;
*New report tab in log windows with a spreadsheet view of sortable net routing values&lt;br /&gt;
*Display of antigap shape on plane layer to visually verify plane hooks&lt;br /&gt;
*Better handling of TCL break when interrupting a routing script&lt;br /&gt;
*Fixes to Constraint Rules dialog box generating DO file (representation of same net clearance type)&lt;br /&gt;
*Updated User’s guide&lt;br /&gt;
*Help/About includes a link to the latest version&lt;br /&gt;
*Interface can process Differential Pairs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V6&#039;&#039;&#039;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:electrav6.jpg|ELECTRA V6]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New in ELECTRA V6:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Main approach:&#039;&#039;&#039; Improvements to the differential pair and minimum length autorouting. For illustration, see [http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/en/ClkFlow.pdf some screenshots] taken while developing the flow for defining minimum length constraints based on the user CLK nets min length requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Further news:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Native Electra for Linux &lt;br /&gt;
*Automatic chamfering of tuned nets supported&lt;br /&gt;
*Specify min/max length amplitude for serpentine pattern (PCB/Class/Net levels)&lt;br /&gt;
*Control for serpentine length gap&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Report network&amp;quot; function to show length stat details of selected nets&lt;br /&gt;
*Differential pair autorouter to support pre-fanout&lt;br /&gt;
*Fanout in zigzag pattern&lt;br /&gt;
*Tune command to autoadjust in-place routed matched/min length nets&lt;br /&gt;
*Enable/disable diff pairs routing to route as single nets&lt;br /&gt;
*Protect/unportect command to protect diff pairs only&lt;br /&gt;
*Write routes by type (protect | unprotect | select)&lt;br /&gt;
*Improved net length reporting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V5&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:electra5screenshot.jpg|ELECTRA V5]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New in ELECTRA V5:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Fast Pattern Router&#039;&#039; producing in everage 20% less total vias&lt;br /&gt;
* enhanced Mitering for long 45° diagonal&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ELECTRA routs significantly quicker, if you waive the use of octagonal pads. Better use round or rectangular ones.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V4&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NEW in V4:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Interactive Contour Router with Push and Shove&lt;br /&gt;
*Dynamic Move and Compaction&lt;br /&gt;
*Adaptive Multi pass conflict reduction technology&lt;br /&gt;
*Advanced Constraints Editor&lt;br /&gt;
*Automatic definition and Routing of Differential Pairs&lt;br /&gt;
*Automatic lengthening and length matching by meandering&lt;br /&gt;
*Real-time Verification of DFM and High speed constraints &lt;br /&gt;
*Active flow: Edit Constraints, AutoRoute&amp;amp;Retry on preselected interconnects&lt;br /&gt;
*PCB CAD plug-in, Specctra® DSN format support&lt;br /&gt;
*Reasonable Cost of ownership&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are purchasing ELECTRA with us, you always will receive the latest version. It is V4 at the moment..&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V3&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
... was on the market only for a while. We at IBF haven&#039;t had it on our product line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V2&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra2screenshot.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;What was new in V2?&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Extending rules hierarchy: PCB &amp;lt; Layer &amp;lt; Class &amp;lt; Class_layer &amp;lt; Net &amp;lt; Net_layer &amp;lt; Area&lt;br /&gt;
**[[ELECTRA 2 Rules-by-Area|Rules-by-Area (width and clearance by region)]]&lt;br /&gt;
***Especially useful around BGAs and fine SMDs&lt;br /&gt;
***Interactive region editor to define area, width and clearance&lt;br /&gt;
*[[ELECTRA 2 Router Strategy Dialog|Router Strategy Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[ELECTRA 2 New Graphical User Interface|New Graphical User Interface]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[ELECTRA 2 Report of routing via styles|Report of routing via styles]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Improved layout display&lt;br /&gt;
**Polygon outline and blind/buried via display&lt;br /&gt;
*Reset and restart - Try different routing strategies with a reset command that deletes all routing&lt;br /&gt;
*Simplified and robust licensing&lt;br /&gt;
**For node-locked licenses, Site and MID codes are now unaffected by changes to BIOS, MB and OS&lt;br /&gt;
**One step configuration upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
** Hassle-free floating license setup&lt;br /&gt;
*Improved User Guide with Tech Tips section&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--== Freeware ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:electrashapebasedautorouter.png|left|100px]] TARGET 3001! offers two genuine auto routers, the [[Contour Autorouter]] and the [[Autorouter|Hybrid_Autorouter]]. From TARGET-Version V15 a &#039;&#039;&#039;250 Pin Version&#039;&#039;&#039; of the auto router ELECTRA is delivered free of charge. In entire functionality you can rout projects up to 250 pins and generate manufacturing data as well. Full licensed versios can be purchased optionally, prices see below. ELECTRA is suitable for complex project because it works at high speed and cares for highest completion rates.||&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[Image:electragelbschwarz_e.png|ELECTRA 250 requires update from time to time...]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[http://www.konekt.com/dld3/setup.exe DOWNLOAD ELECTRA 250 PIN FREEWARE]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;Don&#039;t use this link if you own a purchased ELECTRA license!&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install ELECTRA to a directory of your choice and set in TARGET the path to the ELECTRA.exe in TARGET 3001! &#039;&#039;&#039;layout&#039;&#039;&#039; menu:  &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Actions/Autorouter/ELECTRA auto router...&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the flashing dialog please do individual settings. The tab &amp;quot;Algorithm&amp;quot; allows setting the path to the just installed  electra.exe:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electrapath.jpg|none|Set the path to the electra.exe within this dialog]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please note:&#039;&#039;&#039; If you already own a purchased ELECTRA V1- or V2-Version, don&#039;t overwrite it by installation of the above ELECTRA 250 Pin version.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How much is an ELECTRA license? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All configurations support unlimited power and ground layers. For instance, Route 2L supports two signal layers plus unlimited power and ground layers. All configurations include advanced rule support and mitering capability. Pricing is for node-locked licenses on Windows operating system.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Purchase a license in the TARGET 3001! [https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?currency=USD&amp;amp;language=en&amp;amp;main_page=index SHOP]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;  Look for this logo: [[Image:electra_shopsymbol.png|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=index&amp;amp;cPath=3&amp;amp;language=en SHOP]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Have a short overview here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New versions:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra7_1.jpg|to the shop|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=3&amp;amp;products_id=139&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]] [[Image:electra7_2.jpg|to the shop|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=3&amp;amp;products_id=13&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]] [[Image:electra7_3.jpg|to the shop|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=3&amp;amp;products_id=14&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]] &amp;lt;!--[[Image:electra7_4.jpg|PRO-FUL]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please note: $ = €    German VAT (19% will be added!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--Upgrades to a more powerful edition:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra7_5.jpg|to the shop|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=29&amp;amp;products_id=143&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]] [[Image:electra7_6.jpg|to the shop|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=29&amp;amp;products_id=144&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]]--&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--[[Image:electra7_7.jpg|UL to FUL]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please note: $ = € !!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--Upgrades from older versions:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra7_8.jpg|Old LITE to LITE|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=29&amp;amp;products_id=146&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]] [[Image:electra7_9.jpg|Old 2/4L, BASE, STANDARD to 4L|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=29&amp;amp;products_id=147&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]] [[Image:electra7_91.jpg|Old 6L, EXTENDED, STANDARD, UL to UL|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=29&amp;amp;products_id=148&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[[Image:electra7_92.jpg|Old UL, FUL to FUL]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please note: $ = € !!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Package and freight:&#039;&#039;&#039; Within the European Community please add EUR 23.80 (VAT 19% included). Outside the EC= EUR 25.00&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Payment:&#039;&#039;&#039; Cash in advance by Credit Card (VISA, American Express or Mastercard), by bank transfer (SEPA) or by PayPal towards target@ibfriedrich.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Companies located in the European Community providing a VAT registration code will be charged ex VAT.&lt;br /&gt;
Private customers located in the European Community without a VAT registration code will be charged with a 19% VAT.&lt;br /&gt;
Companies and private customers located outside the European Community will be charged ex VAT.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to activate your license ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A purchased Electra licence is fixed to one computer (node locked licene) while an activation code is required. Please press the caps lock key and double click the electra.exe. It runs for 2 days after first use. The ELECTRA licensing dialog will open to get the  &#039;&#039;Site Code&#039;&#039; as well as the &#039;&#039;Machine IDentity Code (MID)&#039;&#039;. please send both to  [mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com target@ibfriedrich.com], our eMail adress at IBF. We will send over the activation code to you by eMail soonest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further information: [http://www.konekt.com Konekt.com] or see the  [http://www.konekt.com/doc/User_Guide_v7.pdf ELECTRA user guide].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to migrate ELECTRA to a new PC ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most recent best practise you&#039;ll find on the Electra page: See the ELECTRA pricing site at &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Licensing information&amp;quot;&#039;&#039; where the &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;How to Transfer your License&amp;quot;&#039;&#039; - link is:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://konekt.com/wp/pricing/ http://konekt.com/wp/pricing/]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
1. Install the ELECTRA download to the new PC &amp;quot;B&amp;quot; and note the new Site Code to a piece of paper.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Go back to old PC &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;, hold the &amp;quot;shift key&amp;quot; while launching ELECTRA, the old license dialog shows up.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
3. Select &amp;quot;Transfer license&amp;quot; and enter the Site Code of new PC &amp;quot;B&amp;quot; to the field to the right.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Electra_transfer_license1.jpg|none|Electra license dialog]]Image: The Electra license dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Hit &#039;&#039;Continue&amp;gt;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; so that the new activation code will be generated.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Electra_transfer_license2.jpg|none|New Activation Code]]Image: New Activation Code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. Save the new activation code as a small text file on any medium (e.g. USB stick) in order to carry it to computer B. You might also send it in an email to yourself to the new computer (to transfer it properly. Or maybe use your smartphone...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. Enter the new activation code to the field &amp;quot;Activation code&amp;quot; on the new PC.Done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ELECTRA Update ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An Update within the current main ELECTRA version number is &#039;&#039;&#039;free of charge&#039;&#039;&#039;. An upgrade from lower editions or earlier main versions is &#039;&#039;&#039;a purchase&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily update your purchased current version of ELECTRA by exchanging the electra.exe file. This is how you get it:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:electraupdate.jpg|none|Electra Update]]Image ELECTRA Update. Link to the ELECTRA website: [https://konekt.com/ https://konekt.com/]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save the setup.exe provided by the link to a directory of your choice. A double click upon it later opens the install shield. During the setup you will get asked where to install the electra.exe. Now choose the same destination (the same path) so that TARGET 3001! later will be able to find the new exe-file. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How does ELECTRA produce a PCB layout from my TARGET 3001! schematic? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electragrafik.jpg|left]] After your schematic work in TARGET has finished, you would import your packages to the layout. Now you see a tangle of [[Airwires / Ratsnest|air wires (ratsnest)]], which now wait for disentangeling. ELECTRA asks TARGET 3001! to create a file in the DSN standard, which ELECTRA is able ro read in. The routing result which ELECTRA delivers is a session file (*.ses), which TARGET now is able to read in (see image to the left). This happens for TARGET users on button click. No bustling around in TARGET itself.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;An example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra_dns_0_e.jpg|A TARGET projekt unrouted]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: A TARGET project unrouted. Then [Ctrl]+[R] pressed to open the dialog &amp;quot;External Autorouter&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;No signal highlighted means: All signals will be used for routing. After pressing &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot; ELECTRA overtakes a *.dsn file and routs it. After ELECTRA has done its work it simply needs to be saved, so that instantly a session file (*.ses) will be made out of it. The image of the routing result in ELECTRA can be closed:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra_dns_1.jpg|Just close the electra dialog and confirm by &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Save the *.dsn file and so create the *.ses file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra_dns_3.jpg|Press &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Accept the proposed saving directory and press &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra_dns_2_e.jpg|Accept]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Accepts the routed project to TARGET by saying &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra_dns_4.jpg|Routing result in TARGET]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The routed project in TARGET 3001!. All tracks can now be manupulated as usually in TARGET.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What do the tabs of the dialog for external auto routers in TARGET 3001! mean? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Tab &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Signals&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; all unrouted signals appear in a list. Which signal you&#039;dlike to have routed please select by highlighting its signal name in the list. Using the [Ctrl] key you can highlight several signals at the same time. Clicking it again will unhighlight it. With the buttons &amp;quot;Select all&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Deselect all&amp;quot;, you&#039;ll have them on one strike. If you press &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot;, without having highlighted any signal, all signals get routed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExternDlg1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The &amp;quot;Signals&amp;quot; tab in the &#039;&#039;External autorouter&#039;&#039; dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section &amp;quot;Signal tracks&amp;quot; you can enter to the line &amp;quot;Minimum Track width:&amp;quot;. This value is taken at minimum while routing even if you define it smaller in the schematic signal. But if you define a bigger value in the schematic signal than the one entered here, the bigger one will be taken. The same with the minimum spacing of tracks. At first the distance copper to copper counts. In the project test dialog the aura can be added. Vias also can achieve minimum width values regarding the drill hole. The width of an annular copper ring around the drill hole can be defined. An annular ring exists if a 4mm copper circle is center drilled by a 2mm drill. Around the hole a ring of 1mm width remains. The minimum entries here control the size of the vias.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The tab &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Algorithm&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; allows strategic settings. Memory structures (as far as used in the layout) might be routed first in order not to have too many obstacles later. The same with fan outs at packages having a narrow pinout. Fan outs allow an escape to the opposite layer with a differently preferred routing direction. During disentangeling passes connections are made, during optimization passes the track lengthes are tightened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExternDlg2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Tab &amp;quot;Algorithm&amp;quot; in the &#039;&#039;External autorouter&#039;&#039; dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Set the path to the electra exe You can tell TARTET 3001! where the electra exe is located. Enter the path to the line: &amp;quot;External Router, program-file&amp;quot; so that TARGET 3001! will start it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tab &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Route layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; please select a certain routing layer and in the area to the right define how the layer shall be used for which signals. Preferred routing direction means the preferred direction of the tracks on one layer face: horizontally or vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExternDlg3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Tab &amp;quot;Route layers&amp;quot; in the &#039;&#039;External autorouter&#039;&#039; dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Good if for every layer a certain preferred routing direction is defined. Routing in all directions upon one layer can be avoided that way. At the same time one can predefine certain layers for certain signals or forbid them for certain signals. A Route prohibition area is defined on a certain layer having exactly this function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:ELECTRA]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Electra]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Partner]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Autorouter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Electraupdate.jpg&amp;diff=28967</id>
		<title>File:Electraupdate.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Electraupdate.jpg&amp;diff=28967"/>
		<updated>2021-08-12T14:23:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Electra&amp;diff=28966</id>
		<title>Electra</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Electra&amp;diff=28966"/>
		<updated>2021-08-12T14:22:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* ELECTRA Update */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electracolor200.png|Electra Shape based Autorouter|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Shape Based PCB Autorouter&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Preface&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TARGET 3001! contains two internal autorouters, the [[Contour Autorouter]] and the [[Hybrid Autorouter]]. Additionally an interface for &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA&#039;&#039;&#039;, a powerful external autorouter can instantly be used in every TARGET 3001! edition. Fully licensed ELECTRA versions can separately be purchased, prices see below. ELECTRA is suitable for the more advanced and complex projects. It is working very quickly and reaches high completion rates. ELECTRA is a product of Konekt SPRL, Belgium,  [http://konekt.com/c5/index.php www.konekt.com]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[Image:videoicon.png]] &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[https://server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/electra/Electra_e.mp4 &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA video&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt; &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(mute)]&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra4layout.png|thumb|750px|none|A complex layout being autorouted with ELECTRA]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to start ELECTRA in TARGET 3001!? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install ELECTRA to a directory of your choice. Open TARGET 3001! and open layout menu:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Actions/Automatisms and assistants/Autorouter/ELECTRA auto router... [Ctrl]+[R]&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Electra_menu_0.jpg|ELECTRA menu path]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dialog &amp;quot;External Autorouter&amp;quot;. Open the TAB &#039;&#039;&#039;Algorithm&#039;&#039;&#039;. Please find the line to enter the path to the Electra.exe beneath: External router, program file: Click the button with the drop down arrow in order to open your Windows browser.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electrapfad_e.jpg|ELECTRA folder path]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can have the electra.exe in any directory of your choice. You only need to point TARGET there by entering the path to this line.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;If you purchase a license by us, you always will receive the latest version.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V8&#039;&#039;&#039; (current main version) ==&lt;br /&gt;
v8.05 (Sept 2020)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://konekt.com/doc/Electra_v8.pdf Info about V8 (PDF)]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Routing engine has a new push and shove routing pass that is now applied automatically on highly congested boards to resolve spacing violations more quickly than by rerouting nets. This improves performance and completion rate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Multi-Routing strategy providing an easy method to define and run multiple routing strategies within the same session.&lt;br /&gt;
*Advanced Routing strategy, use TCL with DO file extensions to control the strategy with for_loop, if statement, etc…&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V7&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
v7.00 (Jan 2018)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*User defined &amp;quot;from-to&amp;quot; for redefining the net topology&lt;br /&gt;
*New general purpose single layer no-via router&lt;br /&gt;
*Controlled flow to route decoupling capacitor with tracks and the rest with via to planes&lt;br /&gt;
*New “gloss” command to review existing routes to remove extra bends and redundant vias without rerouting like “clean”&lt;br /&gt;
*New report tab in log windows with a spreadsheet view of sortable net routing values&lt;br /&gt;
*Display of antigap shape on plane layer to visually verify plane hooks&lt;br /&gt;
*Better handling of TCL break when interrupting a routing script&lt;br /&gt;
*Fixes to Constraint Rules dialog box generating DO file (representation of same net clearance type)&lt;br /&gt;
*Updated User’s guide&lt;br /&gt;
*Help/About includes a link to the latest version&lt;br /&gt;
*Interface can process Differential Pairs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V6&#039;&#039;&#039;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:electrav6.jpg|ELECTRA V6]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New in ELECTRA V6:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Main approach:&#039;&#039;&#039; Improvements to the differential pair and minimum length autorouting. For illustration, see [http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/en/ClkFlow.pdf some screenshots] taken while developing the flow for defining minimum length constraints based on the user CLK nets min length requirements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Further news:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Native Electra for Linux &lt;br /&gt;
*Automatic chamfering of tuned nets supported&lt;br /&gt;
*Specify min/max length amplitude for serpentine pattern (PCB/Class/Net levels)&lt;br /&gt;
*Control for serpentine length gap&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Report network&amp;quot; function to show length stat details of selected nets&lt;br /&gt;
*Differential pair autorouter to support pre-fanout&lt;br /&gt;
*Fanout in zigzag pattern&lt;br /&gt;
*Tune command to autoadjust in-place routed matched/min length nets&lt;br /&gt;
*Enable/disable diff pairs routing to route as single nets&lt;br /&gt;
*Protect/unportect command to protect diff pairs only&lt;br /&gt;
*Write routes by type (protect | unprotect | select)&lt;br /&gt;
*Improved net length reporting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V5&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:electra5screenshot.jpg|ELECTRA V5]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New in ELECTRA V5:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Fast Pattern Router&#039;&#039; producing in everage 20% less total vias&lt;br /&gt;
* enhanced Mitering for long 45° diagonal&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ELECTRA routs significantly quicker, if you waive the use of octagonal pads. Better use round or rectangular ones.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V4&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NEW in V4:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Interactive Contour Router with Push and Shove&lt;br /&gt;
*Dynamic Move and Compaction&lt;br /&gt;
*Adaptive Multi pass conflict reduction technology&lt;br /&gt;
*Advanced Constraints Editor&lt;br /&gt;
*Automatic definition and Routing of Differential Pairs&lt;br /&gt;
*Automatic lengthening and length matching by meandering&lt;br /&gt;
*Real-time Verification of DFM and High speed constraints &lt;br /&gt;
*Active flow: Edit Constraints, AutoRoute&amp;amp;Retry on preselected interconnects&lt;br /&gt;
*PCB CAD plug-in, Specctra® DSN format support&lt;br /&gt;
*Reasonable Cost of ownership&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;If you are purchasing ELECTRA with us, you always will receive the latest version. It is V4 at the moment..&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V3&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
... was on the market only for a while. We at IBF haven&#039;t had it on our product line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;ELECTRA V2&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra2screenshot.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;What was new in V2?&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Extending rules hierarchy: PCB &amp;lt; Layer &amp;lt; Class &amp;lt; Class_layer &amp;lt; Net &amp;lt; Net_layer &amp;lt; Area&lt;br /&gt;
**[[ELECTRA 2 Rules-by-Area|Rules-by-Area (width and clearance by region)]]&lt;br /&gt;
***Especially useful around BGAs and fine SMDs&lt;br /&gt;
***Interactive region editor to define area, width and clearance&lt;br /&gt;
*[[ELECTRA 2 Router Strategy Dialog|Router Strategy Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[ELECTRA 2 New Graphical User Interface|New Graphical User Interface]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[ELECTRA 2 Report of routing via styles|Report of routing via styles]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Improved layout display&lt;br /&gt;
**Polygon outline and blind/buried via display&lt;br /&gt;
*Reset and restart - Try different routing strategies with a reset command that deletes all routing&lt;br /&gt;
*Simplified and robust licensing&lt;br /&gt;
**For node-locked licenses, Site and MID codes are now unaffected by changes to BIOS, MB and OS&lt;br /&gt;
**One step configuration upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
** Hassle-free floating license setup&lt;br /&gt;
*Improved User Guide with Tech Tips section&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--== Freeware ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:electrashapebasedautorouter.png|left|100px]] TARGET 3001! offers two genuine auto routers, the [[Contour Autorouter]] and the [[Autorouter|Hybrid_Autorouter]]. From TARGET-Version V15 a &#039;&#039;&#039;250 Pin Version&#039;&#039;&#039; of the auto router ELECTRA is delivered free of charge. In entire functionality you can rout projects up to 250 pins and generate manufacturing data as well. Full licensed versios can be purchased optionally, prices see below. ELECTRA is suitable for complex project because it works at high speed and cares for highest completion rates.||&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;[[Image:electragelbschwarz_e.png|ELECTRA 250 requires update from time to time...]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[http://www.konekt.com/dld3/setup.exe DOWNLOAD ELECTRA 250 PIN FREEWARE]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;Don&#039;t use this link if you own a purchased ELECTRA license!&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install ELECTRA to a directory of your choice and set in TARGET the path to the ELECTRA.exe in TARGET 3001! &#039;&#039;&#039;layout&#039;&#039;&#039; menu:  &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Actions/Autorouter/ELECTRA auto router...&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the flashing dialog please do individual settings. The tab &amp;quot;Algorithm&amp;quot; allows setting the path to the just installed  electra.exe:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electrapath.jpg|none|Set the path to the electra.exe within this dialog]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Please note:&#039;&#039;&#039; If you already own a purchased ELECTRA V1- or V2-Version, don&#039;t overwrite it by installation of the above ELECTRA 250 Pin version.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How much is an ELECTRA license? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All configurations support unlimited power and ground layers. For instance, Route 2L supports two signal layers plus unlimited power and ground layers. All configurations include advanced rule support and mitering capability. Pricing is for node-locked licenses on Windows operating system.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Purchase a license in the TARGET 3001! [https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?currency=USD&amp;amp;language=en&amp;amp;main_page=index SHOP]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;  Look for this logo: [[Image:electra_shopsymbol.png|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=index&amp;amp;cPath=3&amp;amp;language=en SHOP]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Have a short overview here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New versions:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra7_1.jpg|to the shop|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=3&amp;amp;products_id=139&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]] [[Image:electra7_2.jpg|to the shop|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=3&amp;amp;products_id=13&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]] [[Image:electra7_3.jpg|to the shop|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=3&amp;amp;products_id=14&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]] &amp;lt;!--[[Image:electra7_4.jpg|PRO-FUL]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please note: $ = €    German VAT (19% will be added!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--Upgrades to a more powerful edition:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra7_5.jpg|to the shop|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=29&amp;amp;products_id=143&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]] [[Image:electra7_6.jpg|to the shop|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=29&amp;amp;products_id=144&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]]--&amp;gt; &amp;lt;!--[[Image:electra7_7.jpg|UL to FUL]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please note: $ = € !!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--Upgrades from older versions:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra7_8.jpg|Old LITE to LITE|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=29&amp;amp;products_id=146&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]] [[Image:electra7_9.jpg|Old 2/4L, BASE, STANDARD to 4L|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=29&amp;amp;products_id=147&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]] [[Image:electra7_91.jpg|Old 6L, EXTENDED, STANDARD, UL to UL|link=https://server.ibfriedrich.com/shop/index.php?main_page=product_info&amp;amp;cPath=29&amp;amp;products_id=148&amp;amp;zenid=tqvje9eig1d66j9icmmiit91r3]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[[Image:electra7_92.jpg|Old UL, FUL to FUL]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Please note: $ = € !!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Package and freight:&#039;&#039;&#039; Within the European Community please add EUR 23.80 (VAT 19% included). Outside the EC= EUR 25.00&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Payment:&#039;&#039;&#039; Cash in advance by Credit Card (VISA, American Express or Mastercard), by bank transfer (SEPA) or by PayPal towards target@ibfriedrich.com&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Companies located in the European Community providing a VAT registration code will be charged ex VAT.&lt;br /&gt;
Private customers located in the European Community without a VAT registration code will be charged with a 19% VAT.&lt;br /&gt;
Companies and private customers located outside the European Community will be charged ex VAT.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to activate your license ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A purchased Electra licence is fixed to one computer (node locked licene) while an activation code is required. Please press the caps lock key and double click the electra.exe. It runs for 2 days after first use. The ELECTRA licensing dialog will open to get the  &#039;&#039;Site Code&#039;&#039; as well as the &#039;&#039;Machine IDentity Code (MID)&#039;&#039;. please send both to  [mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com target@ibfriedrich.com], our eMail adress at IBF. We will send over the activation code to you by eMail soonest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Further information: [http://www.konekt.com Konekt.com] or see the  [http://www.konekt.com/doc/User_Guide_v7.pdf ELECTRA user guide].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to migrate ELECTRA to a new PC ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most recent best practise you&#039;ll find on the Electra page: See the ELECTRA pricing site at &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Licensing information&amp;quot;&#039;&#039; where the &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;How to Transfer your License&amp;quot;&#039;&#039; - link is:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://konekt.com/wp/pricing/ http://konekt.com/wp/pricing/]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
1. Install the ELECTRA download to the new PC &amp;quot;B&amp;quot; and note the new Site Code to a piece of paper.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Go back to old PC &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;, hold the &amp;quot;shift key&amp;quot; while launching ELECTRA, the old license dialog shows up.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
3. Select &amp;quot;Transfer license&amp;quot; and enter the Site Code of new PC &amp;quot;B&amp;quot; to the field to the right.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Electra_transfer_license1.jpg|none|Electra license dialog]]Image: The Electra license dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Hit &#039;&#039;Continue&amp;gt;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; so that the new activation code will be generated.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Electra_transfer_license2.jpg|none|New Activation Code]]Image: New Activation Code&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
5. Save the new activation code as a small text file on any medium (e.g. USB stick) in order to carry it to computer B. You might also send it in an email to yourself to the new computer (to transfer it properly. Or maybe use your smartphone...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
6. Enter the new activation code to the field &amp;quot;Activation code&amp;quot; on the new PC.Done.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ELECTRA Update ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An Update within the current main ELECTRA version number is &#039;&#039;&#039;free of charge&#039;&#039;&#039;. An upgrade from lower editions or earlier main versions is &#039;&#039;&#039;a purchase&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can easily update your purchased version Vn of ELECTRA by exchanging the electra.exe file. This is how you get it:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:electraupdate.jpg|none|Electra Update]]Image ELECTRA Update. Link to the ELECTRA website: [https://konekt.com/ https://konekt.com/]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Save the setup.exe provided by the link to a directory of your choice. A double click upon it later opens the install shield. During the setup you will get asked where to install the electra.exe. Now choose the same destination (the same path) so that TARGET 3001! later will be able to find the new exe-file. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How does ELECTRA produce a PCB layout from my TARGET 3001! schematic? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electragrafik.jpg|left]] After your schematic work in TARGET has finished, you would import your packages to the layout. Now you see a tangle of [[Airwires / Ratsnest|air wires (ratsnest)]], which now wait for disentangeling. ELECTRA asks TARGET 3001! to create a file in the DSN standard, which ELECTRA is able ro read in. The routing result which ELECTRA delivers is a session file (*.ses), which TARGET now is able to read in (see image to the left). This happens for TARGET users on button click. No bustling around in TARGET itself.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;An example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra_dns_0_e.jpg|A TARGET projekt unrouted]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: A TARGET project unrouted. Then [Ctrl]+[R] pressed to open the dialog &amp;quot;External Autorouter&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;No signal highlighted means: All signals will be used for routing. After pressing &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot; ELECTRA overtakes a *.dsn file and routs it. After ELECTRA has done its work it simply needs to be saved, so that instantly a session file (*.ses) will be made out of it. The image of the routing result in ELECTRA can be closed:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra_dns_1.jpg|Just close the electra dialog and confirm by &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Save the *.dsn file and so create the *.ses file.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra_dns_3.jpg|Press &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Accept the proposed saving directory and press &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra_dns_2_e.jpg|Accept]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Accepts the routed project to TARGET by saying &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:electra_dns_4.jpg|Routing result in TARGET]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The routed project in TARGET 3001!. All tracks can now be manupulated as usually in TARGET.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What do the tabs of the dialog for external auto routers in TARGET 3001! mean? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Tab &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Signals&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; all unrouted signals appear in a list. Which signal you&#039;dlike to have routed please select by highlighting its signal name in the list. Using the [Ctrl] key you can highlight several signals at the same time. Clicking it again will unhighlight it. With the buttons &amp;quot;Select all&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Deselect all&amp;quot;, you&#039;ll have them on one strike. If you press &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot;, without having highlighted any signal, all signals get routed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExternDlg1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The &amp;quot;Signals&amp;quot; tab in the &#039;&#039;External autorouter&#039;&#039; dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section &amp;quot;Signal tracks&amp;quot; you can enter to the line &amp;quot;Minimum Track width:&amp;quot;. This value is taken at minimum while routing even if you define it smaller in the schematic signal. But if you define a bigger value in the schematic signal than the one entered here, the bigger one will be taken. The same with the minimum spacing of tracks. At first the distance copper to copper counts. In the project test dialog the aura can be added. Vias also can achieve minimum width values regarding the drill hole. The width of an annular copper ring around the drill hole can be defined. An annular ring exists if a 4mm copper circle is center drilled by a 2mm drill. Around the hole a ring of 1mm width remains. The minimum entries here control the size of the vias.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The tab &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Algorithm&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; allows strategic settings. Memory structures (as far as used in the layout) might be routed first in order not to have too many obstacles later. The same with fan outs at packages having a narrow pinout. Fan outs allow an escape to the opposite layer with a differently preferred routing direction. During disentangeling passes connections are made, during optimization passes the track lengthes are tightened.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExternDlg2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Tab &amp;quot;Algorithm&amp;quot; in the &#039;&#039;External autorouter&#039;&#039; dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Set the path to the electra exe You can tell TARTET 3001! where the electra exe is located. Enter the path to the line: &amp;quot;External Router, program-file&amp;quot; so that TARGET 3001! will start it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tab &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Route layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; please select a certain routing layer and in the area to the right define how the layer shall be used for which signals. Preferred routing direction means the preferred direction of the tracks on one layer face: horizontally or vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExternDlg3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Tab &amp;quot;Route layers&amp;quot; in the &#039;&#039;External autorouter&#039;&#039; dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Good if for every layer a certain preferred routing direction is defined. Routing in all directions upon one layer can be avoided that way. At the same time one can predefine certain layers for certain signals or forbid them for certain signals. A Route prohibition area is defined on a certain layer having exactly this function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:ELECTRA]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Electra]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Partner]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Autorouter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Kontextmenu_e.jpg&amp;diff=28965</id>
		<title>File:Kontextmenu e.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Kontextmenu_e.jpg&amp;diff=28965"/>
		<updated>2021-07-28T14:41:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Line&amp;diff=28964</id>
		<title>Line</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Line&amp;diff=28964"/>
		<updated>2021-07-28T14:40:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* Trim lines */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== You can reach this mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[Ctrl]+[2]&#039;&#039;&#039; (do not use the &amp;quot;2&amp;quot; in the numbers block of the keyboard) or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Draw Line&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Menu Elements]]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Line.jpg]] under the icon [[Image:pen.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Pleae note:&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
[[Drawing]] a line does not mean placing a [[signal]] track! A line in TARGET is just a kind of painting and can not achieve electrical functions. Lines are used e.g. for the drawing of [[outline]]s of component symbols or packages (upon layer &#039;&#039;&#039;21 Position top&#039;&#039;&#039; or layer &#039;&#039;&#039;7 Position bottom&#039;&#039;&#039;), for the [[outline]] of the whole board (upon layer &#039;&#039;&#039;23 Outline&#039;&#039;&#039;), for the imaging of a [[bridge]] e.g. on layer &#039;&#039;&#039;21 position top&#039;&#039;&#039;, for the force lines between corresponding potentiometers, between inductivity and contact of a relay and for any kind of drawing upon any kind of layer. For drawing signals and tracks please use the icons: [[Image:DrawSignal.jpg]] and [[image:DrawTrack.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What you can do... ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press &#039;&#039;&#039;[o]&#039;&#039;&#039; (for options) for line settings. A [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] click creates the first segment. Use further [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] clicks to draw a polyline. Also use the drag-function &#039;&#039;&#039;[g]&#039;&#039;&#039;. Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] upon a line and grab one of the little black touchpads at the ends of the highlighted line by [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1H&#039;&#039;&#039;]] and drag it to the desired spot. Add vertices by pressing [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M2&#039;&#039;&#039;]] on a box and follow the context menu.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:zeichnen4_e.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Right mouse key &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; on a black touchpad of a line opens the context menu &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the bending mode here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:bending_modes.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Using the space bar toggles between &amp;quot;neighboured&amp;quot; bending modes during the placemnet of lines. See also [[Drag]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Leave this mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M12&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Line Options ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_LineOptions.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Rounded:&#039;&#039;&#039; The ends of the line segment have round caps. This causes smart connections of segments when sharp bending.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Hatched:&#039;&#039;&#039; Hatched lines can be used for the force lines between corresponding potentiometers and between inductivity and contact of a relay (line options).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lines show too wide == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have also a look at menu &amp;quot;Settings / Settings-Options&amp;quot; and define how wide a one pixel line really shall display:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Linienbreite_e.jpg|line width|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Define the real line width of a one pixel line.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Trim lines ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines crossing each other can be trimmed (=deleted) to the point of intersection. Please find this function in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;Actions/Trim lines&#039;&#039;&#039;. Highlighted lines will be converted to segments so that parts of the lines can be deleted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;&#039;&#039;full circle&#039;&#039;&#039;, for example, must always be cut at &#039;&#039;&#039;two positions&#039;&#039;&#039; the same time. If a line starts inside the circle and ends outside the circle, only the line will be cut into two pieces after &amp;quot;Trim lines&amp;quot; was used. The circle itself closes again &amp;quot;from behind&amp;quot; thus is cut only at one position. Only if at least 2 lines intersect the circle the way described, or one line intersects the circle two two, two arcs of the circle will be created. So at least 2 intersections within a full circle are needed.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example shows how to create an inner outbreak within the PCB [[outline]] having the shape of a segment of a circle:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LinienTrimmen1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; An outline figure consisting of two drawing elements&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LinienTrimmen2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 2:&#039;&#039;&#039; Highlight the elements subtending to each other ([Shift]+[M1])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LinienTrimmen3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 3:&#039;&#039;&#039; Select option &amp;quot;Trim Lines...&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Actions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LinienTrimmen4.png]]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 4:&#039;&#039;&#039; Highlight - &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LinienTrimmen5.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 5:&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LinienTrimmen6.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 6:&#039;&#039;&#039; Highlight -  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LinienTrimmen7.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 7:&#039;&#039;&#039; Delete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kontextmenu_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 8:&#039;&#039;&#039; Context menu: Untick line if ticked&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Shift lines ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you double click on a line the dialog &amp;quot;Change lines&amp;quot; opens. You can shift the position of the lines by giving an add or a subtract command in the coordinate box. The following image shows how to shift a line 2mm to the right side. Double click  ([[M11]])upon the line and see the following dialog:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:koordbox1_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In case a single click on the line always highlights the whole package, please release button [[Image:SelByElem.jpg]] which is located in the sidebar on the right. Now enter the values &amp;quot;+2&amp;quot; to the x-coordinates of the start and end points of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:koordbox2.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you now again doubleclick the shifted line, the modifications of the coordinates are overtaken.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:koordbox3_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.[[de:Linie]][[fr:Trait]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:modes]][[category:elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Licence_policy&amp;diff=28963</id>
		<title>Licence policy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Licence_policy&amp;diff=28963"/>
		<updated>2021-07-28T09:42:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;20&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:Target3001frei300.png]]||&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;We offer:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*single user licences for [[Editions and prices|private and commercial use]]&lt;br /&gt;
*discounted multiuser licences. Please [mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com mail us]&lt;br /&gt;
*inexpensive single user licences for [[student]]s (non commercial)&lt;br /&gt;
*inexpensive 16-user licences for [[School|classrooms/laboratories]] (non commercial)&lt;br /&gt;
*inexpensive campus licences for [[School|schools or universities]] (non commercial)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;No hardware protection system (dongle)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Fixed price - no licence by subscription&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Not tied to a certain PC (node locking)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;No module-hassle - always the complete system&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;No activation codes - just install&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;You&#039;ll get an installation CD - no copy protection&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;No special installer required&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;TARGET will not be &#039;&#039;[[Online|calling home]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The licence is valid for an unlimited period of time.  The version will work as long as you find a Windows on which it can be installed. All updates of the current main version are included for free. Every one and a half years a new main version is released as an update, which you can purchase. If you do not want to do this paid update, keep your old version.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can always find the latest version on our [[Download|download page]]. The development of earlier versions V20, V19, V18, V17... is finished, there are no further updates here. Nevertheless these versions still work. Projects, which you have created e.g. in V18, can be opened and edited in the current version without any problems. Also your self-created components, which you have saved in your V18 component database, can still be used. Even if you install and try out the current TARGET demo version, your V18 will still work. Several versions with different main version numbers on one computer do not irritate each other.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;30&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Starting with a lower version, you might enlarge it later. For an [[upgrade]] you will pay the difference price plus about 20% of the initial version&#039;s price.  Non-commercial versions (such as educational and student versions) are excluded from the update pricing mechanism. In this case the new price must always be paid.||The licence of the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Download|free version]] and the light version&#039;&#039;&#039; is &#039;&#039;&#039;non commercial&#039;&#039;&#039;. But all functions are entirely active, no time restriction, no registration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 You may copy a single user licence to as many PCs as you like, but you must make sure that it closed on PC 1 before you open it on PC 2.&lt;br /&gt;
 You can open TARGET more than once on one PC. See the following illustration.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: OverlappingTimes.jpg|none]] Image: 1 and 2 are overlapping times. This is against single use agreement. After 20 hours of goodwill warning messages pop up. You should take them seriously. after 50 hours of double use a single user license locks down. The purchase of a further license is required.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Updates and upgrades as well as multi user licences are only possible for the current main version.&lt;br /&gt;
 A purchase of an update or an upgrade leads to a new installation of the purchased edition.&lt;br /&gt;
 It does not expand the initial version though it will still run. Both do not establish an additional user licence.&lt;br /&gt;
 Old and current version in this respect must not be used simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 TARGET 3001! has a licence checking system giving out warning messages in case your licence is used&lt;br /&gt;
 against this rule. If you do not terminate the reason of misuse (you&#039;ll get warnings) TARGET 3001! will&lt;br /&gt;
 shut down completely and won&#039;t start anymore. Only a purchase of further licences can restart it.&lt;br /&gt;
 This licence checking system is working autonomously and locally. It does not send data to IBF or&lt;br /&gt;
 contact IBF servers anyhow for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;At no time there are any of your data transferred to us in this respect.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Please [mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com contact us] if any questions arise.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Only if you actively place a PCB purchase order from out of the software (e.g. you order a board manufacture at PCB-Pool) we get a copy. The time of starting and ending TARGET 3001! is relevant for the licence check. By the way: Hibernation, i.e. the PC&#039;s rest period, does not count. The PC must be properly switched on. TARGET writes a time stamp to the data file every 15 minutes. TARGET cannot do this during &amp;quot;sleep&amp;quot; or hibernation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Don&#039;t use TARGET 3001! with a wrong system time and do not manipulate the INI-files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple use: How can I make sure that TARGET runs without trouble? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best is to buy as much licences as you have users. Each user closes his TARGET at the end of his session. If you have more users than the number of licenced workstations (users) and if they all work in the same local network, you might wish to give an alert to the exceeding one. Provide an empty text file named &#039;&#039;TargetCounter.txt&#039;&#039; where all TARGETs which are currently started get recognized. If an additional user wants access, TARGET gives an alert that the number of permissions is reached at the moment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For getting this, each TARGET 3001! should be installed as usual and started once and closed again. During this action the file Target.ini gets created. The path to it please find in menu Settings/ Settings (INI file) at the very top of the dialog. While TARGET is closed, please edit this Target.ini file using a simple text editor (e.g. MS-Notepad). In the section [Directory] enter the path to your text file, e.g.:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LicenseCounterFile=&#039;Z:\MyPath\TargetCounter.txt&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This file needs to be furnished with reading and writing permission for TARGET. Every starting TARGET now fills in to this file and if closing, it deletes its fill.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:About TARGET 3001!]][[de:Lizenz]][[fr:Licence_de_usage]][[Category:Homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Licence_policy&amp;diff=28962</id>
		<title>Licence policy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Licence_policy&amp;diff=28962"/>
		<updated>2021-07-28T09:36:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;20&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:Target3001frei300.png]]||&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;We offer:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*single user licences for [[Editions and prices|private and commercial use]]&lt;br /&gt;
*discounted multiuser licences. Please [mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com mail us]&lt;br /&gt;
*inexpensive single user licences for [[student]]s (non commercial)&lt;br /&gt;
*inexpensive 16-user licences for [[School|classrooms/laboratories]] (non commercial)&lt;br /&gt;
*inexpensive campus licences for [[School|schools or universities]] (non commercial)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;center&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;No hardware protection system (dongle)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Fixed price - no licence by subscription&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Not tied to a certain PC (node locking)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;No module-hassle - always the complete system&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;No activation codes - just install&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;You&#039;ll get an installation CD - no copy protection&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;No special installer required&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;TARGET will not be &#039;&#039;[[Online|calling home]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/center&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The licence is valid for an unlimited period of time.  The version will work as long as you find a Windows on which it can be installed. All updates of the current main version are included for free. Every one and a half years a new main version is released as an update, which you can purchase. If you do not want to do this paid update, keep your old version.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can always find the latest version on our [[Download|download page]]. The development of earlier versions V20, V19, V18, V17... is finished, there are no further updates here. Nevertheless these versions still work. Projects, which you have created e.g. in V18, can be opened and edited in the current version without any problems. Also your self-created components, which you have saved in your V18 component database, can still be used. Even if you install and try out the current TARGET demo version, your V18 will still work. Several versions with different main version numbers on one computer do not irritate each other.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;30&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Starting with a lower version, you might enlarge it later. For an [[upgrade]] you will pay the difference price plus about 20% of the initial version&#039;s price.  Non-commercial versions (such as educational and student versions) are excluded from the update pricing mechanism. In this case the new price must always be paid.||The licence of the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Download|free version]] and the light version&#039;&#039;&#039; is &#039;&#039;&#039;non commercial&#039;&#039;&#039;. But all functions are entirely active, no time restriction, no registration.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 You may copy a single user licence to as many PCs as you like, but you must make sure that it closed on PC 1 before you open it on PC 2.&lt;br /&gt;
 You can open TARGET more than once on one PC. See the following illustration...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: OverlappingTimes.jpg|none]] Image: 1 and 2 are overlapping times. This is against single use agreement. After a short while of goodwill warning messages pop up. You should take them seriously.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Updates and upgrades as well as multi user licences are only possible for the current main version.&lt;br /&gt;
 A purchase of an update or an upgrade leads to a new installation of the purchased edition.&lt;br /&gt;
 It does not expand the initial version though it will still run. Both do not establish an additional user licence.&lt;br /&gt;
 Old and current version in this respect must not be used simultaneously.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 TARGET 3001! has a licence checking system giving out warning messages in case your licence is used&lt;br /&gt;
 against this rule. If you do not terminate the reason of misuse (you&#039;ll get warnings) TARGET 3001! will&lt;br /&gt;
 shut down completely and won&#039;t start anymore. Only a purchase of further licences can restart it.&lt;br /&gt;
 This licence checking system is working autonomously and locallyand does not send data to IBF or&lt;br /&gt;
 contact IBF servers anyhow for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;At no time there are any of your data transferred to us in this respect.&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Please [mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com contact us] if any questions arise.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Only if you actively place a purchase order from out of the software (e.g. you order a board manufacture at PCB-Pool) we get a copy. The time of starting and ending TARGET 3001! is relevant for the licence check. By the way: Hibernation, i.e. the PC&#039;s rest period, does not count. The PC must be properly switched on. TARGET writes a time stamp to the data file every 15 minutes. TARGET cannot do this during &amp;quot;sleep&amp;quot; or hibernation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Don&#039;t use TARGET 3001! with a wrong system time and do not manipulate the INI-files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple use: How can I make sure that TARGET runs without trouble? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best is to buy as much licences as you have users. Each user closes his TARGET at the end of his session. If you have more users than the number of licenced workstations (users) and if they all work in the same local network, you might wish to give an alert to the exceeding one. Provide an empty text file named &#039;&#039;TargetCounter.txt&#039;&#039; where all TARGETs which are currently started get recognized. If an additional user wants access, TARGET gives an alert that the number of permissions is reached at the moment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For getting this, each TARGET 3001! should be installed as usual and started once and closed again. During this action the file Target.ini gets created. The path to it please find in menu Settings/ Settings (INI file) at the very top of the dialog. While TARGET is closed, please edit this Target.ini file using a simple text editor (e.g. MS-Notepad). In the section [Directory] enter the path to your text file, e.g.:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LicenseCounterFile=&#039;Z:\MyPath\TargetCounter.txt&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This file needs to be furnished with reading and writing permission for TARGET. Every starting TARGET now fills in to this file and if closing, it deletes its fill.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:About TARGET 3001!]][[de:Lizenz]][[fr:Licence_de_usage]][[Category:Homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Component_database&amp;diff=28961</id>
		<title>Component database</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Component_database&amp;diff=28961"/>
		<updated>2021-07-26T09:17:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* Where is the component data base located on my computer? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#ev:youtube|R1SfoWVzGjg|300|left|How to use the component database}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= General =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:database440_e.png|400px|left|The component browser based on the SQL data base]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Say &amp;quot;Good Bye&amp;quot; to the library idea. There are no component libraries any more.&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Instead there is only one &#039;&#039;&#039;data base&#039;&#039;&#039; containing all components and all related elements.&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each component can be identified by its name and/or parameters. This SQL database is named &#039;&#039;&#039;target3001.db&#039;&#039;&#039;. The component data base runs locally on every PC independently from the web.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Component_database#Where_is_the_component_data_base_located_on_my_computer.3F|This is the location of the data base on your PC.]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The data base is server compatible that means you can install the data base to a server so that different clients have access to it at the same time. The terms of the TARGET 3001! license policy please see the article [[License]]. Open the component database by the icons [[Image:InsertComponent.jpg]] or [[Image:InsertPackage.jpg]] or use the keyboard key &#039;&#039;&#039;[Ins]&#039;&#039;&#039;. For the edition of an existing component please press functional key &#039;&#039;&#039;[F2]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The component databasse offers various search options: the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Components&#039;&#039;&#039;, the Tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Gallery&#039;&#039;&#039; and the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Packages&#039;&#039;&#039;. It is possible to browse within the amount of parts delivered by TARGET 3001!, in your own customized USER-parts (self drawn or self assembled) or within both. Tick the boxes accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
Some items of the data base menus are self explanatory. Others are explained in the article [[Component browser]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;display: block; clear: both;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Where is the component data base located on my computer? =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The component database is one single file named: &#039;&#039;&#039;target3001.db&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have installed TARGET 3001! please have a look here to find it:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image: databasepath_e.jpg|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: How to find the location of your component data base. &amp;quot;Markus&amp;quot; that is me as a user. Your &#039;&#039;user&#039;&#039; sure will be different.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Using Windows Vista und Windows 7/8/10 you will find it here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;C:\Users\[username]\AppData\Roaming\ibf\TarVn\[edition]\Database&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Windows XP you will find the SQLite component data base here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;C:\Documents and Settings\[username]\Application data\ibf\TarVn\[edition]\Database&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exchange [username] by your individual user name or by &#039;&#039;&#039;All Users&#039;&#039;&#039; (using WinXP) or &#039;&#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039;&#039;. Exchange [edition] by the name of your edition, e.g.. professional or discover. The n in TarVn means your current main version number, e.g. &#039;&#039;30&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If some folders in your Windows explorer are hidden, please set your Windows the way that you can &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[http://www.google.de/#q=hidden+folders see all folders and all file extensions]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. You can place the component data base file to any folder you like, you only need to point TARGET there. Please see TARGET menu &amp;quot;Settings/Settings(INI file)&amp;quot;.  Also network drives with UNC names can be created, e.g. &#039;&#039;&#039;\\server\target3001\database&#039;&#039;&#039;. If several users want to use the data base simultaneously it is recommended to use a [[MySQL]]-Server .&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;In my version V30 the data base path points to V19!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 No problem at all. Do a free data base update to get all current parts. So you are up to date while all USER parts remain untouched.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use a directory in [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dropbox_(service) DropBox], [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Microsoft_OneDrive OneDrive] or [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Google_Drive Google Drive] to keep the SQLite database synchronised everywhere.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;Alias: where is the data base? Directory of the data base folder of the data base data base folder path to the data base&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= How to find a part? =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First open the component browser e. g. using key &#039;&#039;&#039;[Ins]&#039;&#039;&#039; or by the schematic icon &amp;quot;Insert component&amp;quot;:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Einfg_e.jpg|Open the componet browser by the icon: &amp;quot;import component&amp;quot;|none]]Image:Open the componet browser by the icon: &amp;quot;import component&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are &#039;&#039;&#039;four general situations&#039;&#039;&#039; to find a component:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. You know the &#039;&#039;&#039;name of the component&#039;&#039;&#039; e. g. NE555 or 2N3055 or a part of the name. In this case you will enter to the [[Component_database#Component_seach|Search line]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2.  You know the &#039;&#039;&#039;component type&#039;&#039;&#039; and maybe a value of the parameter e. g. resistor 10k. In this case you will [[Component_database#The_parametric_search|search by parameters]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. You know how the component looks like. In this case you may be guided by the [[Gallery]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. You look for a certain component package (housing, soldering pattern). Search and import it to the canvas in order to [[Edit_component|edit it and to save it under a different name]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you still can&#039;t find the part, you might consider to [[Overview on component drawing|draw it in TARGET 3001! yourself]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Component seach =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;I need a NE555 - what to do?&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press on your keyboard key &#039;&#039;&#039;[Ins]&#039;&#039;&#039; in order to open the component data base. Initially you are in Tab &amp;quot;Search&amp;quot;. Enter the name of the component or parts of it to the search line.  After pressing the &amp;quot;Search&amp;quot; button the result might look like this:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: suche3_e.png|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You see there are genuine TARGET parts found as well as USER parts which either might be modified copies of TARGET parts or self drawn parts by the user. Now select from the list of results (green) your favorite part and import its symbol to your schematic by &amp;quot;Import component&amp;quot; in order to wire it. The package with 3d model is assigned to it and is memorized in the list of packge proposals. If later the work in the layout starts one gets the package proposals in to the layout.  All pads are connected by air wires (= ratsnest) according to the wiring in the schematic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= The tab &amp;quot;Quick select&amp;quot; now is tab &amp;quot;Components&amp;quot; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Search for key words while all is allowed: Compomemt name, value, designation, description, value, manufacturer, types etc. and combinations from it. &#039;&#039;&#039;Upper and lower case in writing is not crucial for the search.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you tick the box [[Image:tickbox_e.jpg]] above the search line, it is not only searched within the component names but also in the component descriptions.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A tick at  [[Image:tickbox2_e.jpg]] focuses the search to genuine TARGET-Parts (including todays update).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A tick at  [[Image:tickbox3_e.jpg]] focuses the search to USER parts. Combining both is possible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the keys &#039;&#039;Page up&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Page down&#039;&#039; resp. &#039;&#039;Arrow up&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Arrow down&#039;&#039; selects searching &#039;&#039;&#039;in Components&#039;&#039;&#039; (= symbol and package) or only &#039;&#039;&#039;in packages&#039;&#039;&#039; (light blue field). Using the catch word &amp;quot;Bridge rectifier 3d&amp;quot; makes TARGET 3001! search in the range of all component names including the descriptions. At the same time  TARGET 3001! recognizes that the appendix &#039;&#039;3d&#039;&#039; refers to the existence of a 3D model with the package. Therefore in the row of search results the category 3D will be opened. All components non interpreted are going to be used within the field &#039;&#039;Catchword=Bridgerectifier&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:suche_v15_2_e_.jpg|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The green column shows the results. Colors different to green are possible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The colouring means:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*green = matches&lt;br /&gt;
*yellow = no fault but missing data&lt;br /&gt;
*white = no parameters available&lt;br /&gt;
*red = mismatch regarding parameters &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The more keywords you use, the more columns you get.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display shows [[Symbol|schematic symbol]], [[Pad|Landpattern (package, footprint)]] and [[3D View]]. A click on the 3D view flips the image and allows a modified view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example if you search for &amp;quot;ST&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Maxim&amp;quot;, TARGET 3001! automatically recognizes the entries as  manufacturer. Using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;&#039; to the right of the screen you get the symbol into your schematic and bring the package proposal to the list for later use in the layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The black highlighted word &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; means that this is a part which has been manipulated or modified by the user , e.g. a self edited component or one which had been brought to a separate component group...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=The%20quick%20search I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= The parametric search =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you search for a certain component kind you will find it highlighted in the list to the left. The list shows component groups (darker gray) and component types (lighter gray). Additionally you will see a little button allowing a search for parameters related to the part in question.&amp;lt;!--[[file:parametric_search_btn.jpg|The button to open the parametrical search if a search can be sharpened by the use of parameters|none]]Sharpen your search by the use of parameters&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt; The left part of the dialog shows all components subsumed in groups (grey highlighted). &#039;&#039;&#039;Important:&#039;&#039;&#039; There are only these two levels: &#039;&#039;&#039;groups&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;types&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:suche_v15_1_e.jpg|Component groups and types in the column to the left and the parametric search following the button at the end of the line.]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as you have clicked the button mentioned (red arrow), a window opens showing a structure of parameters so that values can be entered specificly to the components character.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:suche_v15_3_e.jpg|The dialog of the parametric search]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the list of results:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:suche_v15_2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button &amp;quot;Import component&amp;quot; gets the part to the schematic and prepares the backage for insertion to the layout:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:suche_v15_4_e.jpg|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the 3D view you would have something like that:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:suche_v15_4a_e.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=The%20parametric%20search I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Weighting, sorting =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Searching the TARGET 3001! component database is a kind of content focused selection process as it is known from Google&amp;amp;reg;. One can take influence on the range within the list of matches by shifting the slider for each parameter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:tickbox4_e.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following weighting is given by default:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Catchwords in name/description (100)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Manufacturer (50)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Package (25)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. rest SMT,... (5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=Weighting,%20sorting I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= How do I search for parts available in a distributor&#039;s shop? =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to open the parametrical search. First select the component type you like to search. In this example: &amp;quot;Bridge rectifier&amp;quot;:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:database_dis_e.jpg|750px|Use the parametric search to find a part in the line of a certain distributor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the parameter &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Distributor&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to the name of your preferred distributor (drop down list). Additionally - if you want - tick the box &amp;quot;3D Model&amp;quot;, so that you will get only those parts listed having a 3D model. The more parameters you set, the smaller the selection gets.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=How%20do%20I%20search%20for%20parts%20available%20in%20a%20distributor&#039;s%20shop? I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= How to search by the use of the Gallery =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have a part in your hand but no clue what it is? Compare it to similar parts. Please have a look here: [[Gallery]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Component not found? =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you still haven&#039;t found what you&#039;re looking for, you can take a look at [http://www.componiverse.com COMPONIVERSE®] which is an online exchange of TARGET user parts on the web. If there is nothing to be found either, please have a look at [[Ultra Librarian]] or at [[Samacsys]] to download the part. If you still haven&#039;t found it, please [[Create a new component|draw a component yourself]]. Always begin with the drawing of the package then draw the symbol. How to proceed please also see here: [[Edit component]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=Component&amp;amp;20not%20found? I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Edit component types  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Edit component types|Please have a look here...]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Add new parameters to a component type =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Add new parameters to a component type|Please have a look here...]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Network situations with the TARGET 3001! database =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The structure of the TARGET 3001! database|The structure of the TARGET 3001! database]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Single user situation with local SQLite component data base ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Server1_e.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; Single user situation with local SQLite component data base&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* for low and medium sized data traffic&lt;br /&gt;
* no server needed while database is embedded locally&lt;br /&gt;
* no additional installations needed&lt;br /&gt;
* components can be assigned according to parameters, they can be assigned to groups and types&lt;br /&gt;
* individually preferred parts can be assigned to lists&lt;br /&gt;
* consistency within the data (no -groups, -types, -names double) &lt;br /&gt;
* lists can be placed to tabs in the browser&lt;br /&gt;
* reach your preferred parts with few clicks&lt;br /&gt;
* parametric search (every component type keeps an individual set of parameters to be set for search)&lt;br /&gt;
* semantic search (keyword &amp;quot;led red&amp;quot;  e.g. leads you to red LEDs. Keyword &amp;quot;4k75W&amp;quot; e.g. leads to the resistors)&lt;br /&gt;
* Creation of new or modified components within the data base as derivates of existing parts (independently from schematic and layout)  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Two-user situation with two local SQLite component databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: cronjob.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 2:&#039;&#039;&#039; Two-user situation with local SQLite component databases&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If only Chris creates components working with a SQLite setup can continue. A CRON-Job could copy the data base file from Chris to Robin after each change. Then no MySQL server would be necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network with access to one central [[MySQL]] client-server data base ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Server2_e.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 3:&#039;&#039;&#039; Network with access to one central [[MySQL]] client-server data base&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* the expert solution for the administration of huge amounts of data  &lt;br /&gt;
* [[MySQL]]-power in a Client-Server-Network&lt;br /&gt;
* all colleagues use the same common database and not hundreds of separate libraries &lt;br /&gt;
* open and well proven data base technology&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Client-Server-Network giving access to one central data base ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Server3.png|750px|TARGET 3001! on a server]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 4:&#039;&#039;&#039; Client-Server-Network giving access to one central data base. There is oportunity to install a mirror of the [[MySQL]] database on an external computer (Michael) to run it SQLite and bring it back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* direct use of the transfered data base&lt;br /&gt;
* data import into an existing data base (Michael or Peter)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=Network%20situations%20with%20the%20TARGET%203001!%20database I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Update the component database =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Update the component database|Please have a look here...]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Convert older libraries to the data base =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:v14import_0_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the data base dialog select menu &amp;quot;Extras/Import libraries SYM3001, REF3001 and PCK3001&amp;quot;. A browser opens from which you can choose your source libs. Confirm the selection with OK and then press button &amp;quot;Import components&amp;quot; (bottom right).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:v14import_1_e.jpg|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now TARGET 3001! checks whether your existing component types (rem: a component type in V14 and older is represented by it&#039;s path in the tree view) matches with the data base. As a result you get your old parts listed in colored line to the left.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:v14import_2.jpg|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the left column you will see &amp;quot;your&amp;quot; component types according to your structure. The colors mean:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Green:&#039;&#039;&#039; Component group and type already exist in the database - files can be overtaken directly. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Blue:&#039;&#039;&#039; Component group  and -type matches with the data base structure but needs to be generated this individual way by TARGET 3001! (automatically done).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Red:&#039;&#039;&#039; Component group and -type (s) are unknown to the database. The user must do the assignment manually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At any time you can do an assignment to a component type by &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; upon the line in question.&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:v14import_3_.jpg|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or you may use the button &amp;quot;Assign a different component type V15&amp;quot;. You then select an appropriate component type or you create a new one by &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also a new component group can be created by &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; upon the gray background of any component group. See main window of component browser left hand side:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:v14import_4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a user has duplicated a certain part for his own purposes, so there is a hash (#) and a perpetual number fixed to it in the sense of &amp;quot;which copy number is this?&amp;quot; At the same time the flag &amp;quot;User&amp;quot; is fixed to it. That means that the user has manipulated this component. Thus it is taken to the amount of &amp;quot;own&amp;quot; components. It will remain untouched by automated component updates.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:V14import_5_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the TAB &amp;quot;My components prior to V15&amp;quot; you see the sub-groups &amp;quot;Libraries&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Component tree view&amp;quot; each with the display you know from those days....&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:v14import_7.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: taken from Version 15...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=Convert%20older%20libraries%20to%20the%20data%20base I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Lists for components and packages =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the database there is no copy of the same part with identical name and manufacturer. Nevertheless a certain component can be part of one or more individual lists created by the user. For example the list: &amp;quot;My preferred operational amps&amp;quot; or the list: &amp;quot;Parts for TV, Phono&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Peter&#039;s parts&amp;quot; oder &amp;quot;The parts of the stepmotor project&amp;quot; or ...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Liste1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thinking in lists is similar to thinking in libraries which means to show a selection of parts according to certain creteria. Assign a part to a list by klicking [[M2]] at the part in the main view of the component browser. Now follow the dialogs of the option bottom of list:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Liste1a_e.jpg|Right mouseclick on the line of a part allows assigning it to a list|none]]Right mouseclick on the line of a part allows assigning it to a list&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to edit lists, please see menu Extra / EditSymbol/Package lists:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Liste2_e.jpg|This image shows how to edit, rename, delete ... a component list|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=Lists%20for%20components%20and%20packages I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Data base backup when upgrading =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the installation of TARGET 3001! a destination directory is proposed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: datenbankverzeichnis_e.png|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Proposed directory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and the component data base will be copied to a sub directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;C:\Programs\ibf\TarVx\discover\AppData\Database\&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If TARGET 3001! gets started the first time the data base will be transfered to &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;C:\Documents and settings\&amp;lt;your user&amp;gt;\ApplicationData\ibf\TarVx\discover\Database\&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; The directory may vary according to the Operation System. TARGET now uses the data base from the &amp;quot;ApplicationData&amp;quot; - directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So there will be used different data base directories for the versions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user grades up from a smart to an economy, he needs to copy his smart database to the Economy directory &#039;&#039;&#039;or&#039;&#039;&#039; point the database path in Menu Settings/Settings (INI-File)...&amp;quot; to the smart data base directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TARGET 3001! at this time does not check during the installation process whether a version already exists in order to use its database.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=Data%20base%20backup%20when%20upgrading I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Update V16 --&amp;gt; V17 --&amp;gt; V18. What about the database? =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During a V18 installation by default a new data base gets installed. If you had a V15, V16 or a V17 with a database which keeps your USER parts sure you like to use them in V18 as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the installation of your new main version you get asked whether to overtake an earlier database. Select and decide from the dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively set the database path in V18 to your existing database from V15, V16 or V17. You also might copy your old data base to the directory where your new Version of TARGET expects it to be.  DON&#039;T USE the Import/Export function in the component browser. This is meant only for individual parts.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Import components from external sources directly into the TARGET component database =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;I am a component manufacturer and would like to import my components directly into the TARGET component data base. Every TARGET user should have immediate access to the CAD data of my components including data sheet link and link to my shop.&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this you need a MySQL access to the TARGET 3001! component database, please contact us:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=mySQL_Zugang I am a component manufacturer and would like to have mySQL access...]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your access data could look like this:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Server: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;office.ibfriedrich.com&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
User: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;MyUsername&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Password: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;MyPassword&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here you have to enter these:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:BtlHerstDB1_e.jpg|Access data|none]]Image: You can only edit the components of the user whom you represent as the manufacturer. This means that the company &#039;&#039;Miller&#039;&#039; cannot change the components of the company &#039;&#039;Smith&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteildatenbank]][[Fr:Base de données des composants]] [[Category: homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Component_database&amp;diff=28960</id>
		<title>Component database</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Component_database&amp;diff=28960"/>
		<updated>2021-07-26T09:15:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* Where is the component data base located on my computer? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{#ev:youtube|R1SfoWVzGjg|300|left|How to use the component database}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= General =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:database440_e.png|400px|left|The component browser based on the SQL data base]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Say &amp;quot;Good Bye&amp;quot; to the library idea. There are no component libraries any more.&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Instead there is only one &#039;&#039;&#039;data base&#039;&#039;&#039; containing all components and all related elements.&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each component can be identified by its name and/or parameters. This SQL database is named &#039;&#039;&#039;target3001.db&#039;&#039;&#039;. The component data base runs locally on every PC independently from the web.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Component_database#Where_is_the_component_data_base_located_on_my_computer.3F|This is the location of the data base on your PC.]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The data base is server compatible that means you can install the data base to a server so that different clients have access to it at the same time. The terms of the TARGET 3001! license policy please see the article [[License]]. Open the component database by the icons [[Image:InsertComponent.jpg]] or [[Image:InsertPackage.jpg]] or use the keyboard key &#039;&#039;&#039;[Ins]&#039;&#039;&#039;. For the edition of an existing component please press functional key &#039;&#039;&#039;[F2]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The component databasse offers various search options: the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Components&#039;&#039;&#039;, the Tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Gallery&#039;&#039;&#039; and the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Packages&#039;&#039;&#039;. It is possible to browse within the amount of parts delivered by TARGET 3001!, in your own customized USER-parts (self drawn or self assembled) or within both. Tick the boxes accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
Some items of the data base menus are self explanatory. Others are explained in the article [[Component browser]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;display: block; clear: both;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Where is the component data base located on my computer? =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The component database is one single file named: &#039;&#039;&#039;target3001.db&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have installed TARGET 3001! please have a look here to find it:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Image: databasepath_e.jpg|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: How to find the location of your component data base. &amp;quot;Markus&amp;quot; that is me as a user. Your &#039;&#039;user&#039;&#039; sure will be different.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Using Windows Vista und Windows 7/8/10 you will find it here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;C:\Users\[username]\AppData\Roaming\ibf\TarVn\[edition]\Database&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Windows XP you will find the SQLite component data base here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;C:\Documents and Settings\[username]\Application data\ibf\TarVn\[edition]\Database&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exchange [username] by your individual user name or by &#039;&#039;&#039;All Users&#039;&#039;&#039; (using WinXP) or &#039;&#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039;&#039;. Exchange [edition] by the name of your edition, e.g.. professional or discover. The n in TarVn means your current main version number, e.g. &#039;&#039;30&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If some folders in your Windows explorer are hidden, please set your Windows the way that you can &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[http://www.google.de/#q=hidden+folders see all folders and all file extensions]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. You can place the component data base file to any folder you like, you only need to point TARGET there. Please see TARGET menu &amp;quot;Settings/Settings(INI file)&amp;quot;.  Also network drives with UNC names can be created, e.g. &#039;&#039;&#039;\\server\target3001\database&#039;&#039;&#039;. If several users want to use the data base simultaneously it is recommended to use a [[MySQL]]-Server .&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;In my version V30 the data base path points to V19!&amp;quot; No problem at all. Do a free data base update to get all current parts. All USER parts remain untouched.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use a directory in [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dropbox_(service) DropBox], [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Microsoft_OneDrive OneDrive] or [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Google_Drive Google Drive] to keep the SQLite database synchronised everywhere.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;Alias: where is the data base? Directory of the data base folder of the data base data base folder path to the data base&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= How to find a part? =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First open the component browser e. g. using key &#039;&#039;&#039;[Ins]&#039;&#039;&#039; or by the schematic icon &amp;quot;Insert component&amp;quot;:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Einfg_e.jpg|Open the componet browser by the icon: &amp;quot;import component&amp;quot;|none]]Image:Open the componet browser by the icon: &amp;quot;import component&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are &#039;&#039;&#039;four general situations&#039;&#039;&#039; to find a component:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. You know the &#039;&#039;&#039;name of the component&#039;&#039;&#039; e. g. NE555 or 2N3055 or a part of the name. In this case you will enter to the [[Component_database#Component_seach|Search line]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2.  You know the &#039;&#039;&#039;component type&#039;&#039;&#039; and maybe a value of the parameter e. g. resistor 10k. In this case you will [[Component_database#The_parametric_search|search by parameters]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. You know how the component looks like. In this case you may be guided by the [[Gallery]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. You look for a certain component package (housing, soldering pattern). Search and import it to the canvas in order to [[Edit_component|edit it and to save it under a different name]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you still can&#039;t find the part, you might consider to [[Overview on component drawing|draw it in TARGET 3001! yourself]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Component seach =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;I need a NE555 - what to do?&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press on your keyboard key &#039;&#039;&#039;[Ins]&#039;&#039;&#039; in order to open the component data base. Initially you are in Tab &amp;quot;Search&amp;quot;. Enter the name of the component or parts of it to the search line.  After pressing the &amp;quot;Search&amp;quot; button the result might look like this:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: suche3_e.png|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You see there are genuine TARGET parts found as well as USER parts which either might be modified copies of TARGET parts or self drawn parts by the user. Now select from the list of results (green) your favorite part and import its symbol to your schematic by &amp;quot;Import component&amp;quot; in order to wire it. The package with 3d model is assigned to it and is memorized in the list of packge proposals. If later the work in the layout starts one gets the package proposals in to the layout.  All pads are connected by air wires (= ratsnest) according to the wiring in the schematic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= The tab &amp;quot;Quick select&amp;quot; now is tab &amp;quot;Components&amp;quot; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Search for key words while all is allowed: Compomemt name, value, designation, description, value, manufacturer, types etc. and combinations from it. &#039;&#039;&#039;Upper and lower case in writing is not crucial for the search.&#039;&#039;&#039; If you tick the box [[Image:tickbox_e.jpg]] above the search line, it is not only searched within the component names but also in the component descriptions.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A tick at  [[Image:tickbox2_e.jpg]] focuses the search to genuine TARGET-Parts (including todays update).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;A tick at  [[Image:tickbox3_e.jpg]] focuses the search to USER parts. Combining both is possible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the keys &#039;&#039;Page up&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Page down&#039;&#039; resp. &#039;&#039;Arrow up&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Arrow down&#039;&#039; selects searching &#039;&#039;&#039;in Components&#039;&#039;&#039; (= symbol and package) or only &#039;&#039;&#039;in packages&#039;&#039;&#039; (light blue field). Using the catch word &amp;quot;Bridge rectifier 3d&amp;quot; makes TARGET 3001! search in the range of all component names including the descriptions. At the same time  TARGET 3001! recognizes that the appendix &#039;&#039;3d&#039;&#039; refers to the existence of a 3D model with the package. Therefore in the row of search results the category 3D will be opened. All components non interpreted are going to be used within the field &#039;&#039;Catchword=Bridgerectifier&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:suche_v15_2_e_.jpg|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The green column shows the results. Colors different to green are possible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The colouring means:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*green = matches&lt;br /&gt;
*yellow = no fault but missing data&lt;br /&gt;
*white = no parameters available&lt;br /&gt;
*red = mismatch regarding parameters &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The more keywords you use, the more columns you get.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display shows [[Symbol|schematic symbol]], [[Pad|Landpattern (package, footprint)]] and [[3D View]]. A click on the 3D view flips the image and allows a modified view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example if you search for &amp;quot;ST&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Maxim&amp;quot;, TARGET 3001! automatically recognizes the entries as  manufacturer. Using the button &#039;&#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;&#039; to the right of the screen you get the symbol into your schematic and bring the package proposal to the list for later use in the layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The black highlighted word &#039;&#039;&#039;User&#039;&#039;&#039; means that this is a part which has been manipulated or modified by the user , e.g. a self edited component or one which had been brought to a separate component group...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=The%20quick%20search I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= The parametric search =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you search for a certain component kind you will find it highlighted in the list to the left. The list shows component groups (darker gray) and component types (lighter gray). Additionally you will see a little button allowing a search for parameters related to the part in question.&amp;lt;!--[[file:parametric_search_btn.jpg|The button to open the parametrical search if a search can be sharpened by the use of parameters|none]]Sharpen your search by the use of parameters&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt; The left part of the dialog shows all components subsumed in groups (grey highlighted). &#039;&#039;&#039;Important:&#039;&#039;&#039; There are only these two levels: &#039;&#039;&#039;groups&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;types&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:suche_v15_1_e.jpg|Component groups and types in the column to the left and the parametric search following the button at the end of the line.]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as you have clicked the button mentioned (red arrow), a window opens showing a structure of parameters so that values can be entered specificly to the components character.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:suche_v15_3_e.jpg|The dialog of the parametric search]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the list of results:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:suche_v15_2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button &amp;quot;Import component&amp;quot; gets the part to the schematic and prepares the backage for insertion to the layout:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:suche_v15_4_e.jpg|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the 3D view you would have something like that:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:suche_v15_4a_e.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=The%20parametric%20search I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Weighting, sorting =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Searching the TARGET 3001! component database is a kind of content focused selection process as it is known from Google&amp;amp;reg;. One can take influence on the range within the list of matches by shifting the slider for each parameter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:tickbox4_e.jpg]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following weighting is given by default:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Catchwords in name/description (100)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Manufacturer (50)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Package (25)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
4. rest SMT,... (5)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=Weighting,%20sorting I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= How do I search for parts available in a distributor&#039;s shop? =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to open the parametrical search. First select the component type you like to search. In this example: &amp;quot;Bridge rectifier&amp;quot;:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:database_dis_e.jpg|750px|Use the parametric search to find a part in the line of a certain distributor]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the parameter &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Distributor&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to the name of your preferred distributor (drop down list). Additionally - if you want - tick the box &amp;quot;3D Model&amp;quot;, so that you will get only those parts listed having a 3D model. The more parameters you set, the smaller the selection gets.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=How%20do%20I%20search%20for%20parts%20available%20in%20a%20distributor&#039;s%20shop? I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= How to search by the use of the Gallery =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have a part in your hand but no clue what it is? Compare it to similar parts. Please have a look here: [[Gallery]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Component not found? =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you still haven&#039;t found what you&#039;re looking for, you can take a look at [http://www.componiverse.com COMPONIVERSE®] which is an online exchange of TARGET user parts on the web. If there is nothing to be found either, please have a look at [[Ultra Librarian]] or at [[Samacsys]] to download the part. If you still haven&#039;t found it, please [[Create a new component|draw a component yourself]]. Always begin with the drawing of the package then draw the symbol. How to proceed please also see here: [[Edit component]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=Component&amp;amp;20not%20found? I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Edit component types  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Edit component types|Please have a look here...]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Add new parameters to a component type =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Add new parameters to a component type|Please have a look here...]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Network situations with the TARGET 3001! database =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The structure of the TARGET 3001! database|The structure of the TARGET 3001! database]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Single user situation with local SQLite component data base ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Server1_e.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; Single user situation with local SQLite component data base&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* for low and medium sized data traffic&lt;br /&gt;
* no server needed while database is embedded locally&lt;br /&gt;
* no additional installations needed&lt;br /&gt;
* components can be assigned according to parameters, they can be assigned to groups and types&lt;br /&gt;
* individually preferred parts can be assigned to lists&lt;br /&gt;
* consistency within the data (no -groups, -types, -names double) &lt;br /&gt;
* lists can be placed to tabs in the browser&lt;br /&gt;
* reach your preferred parts with few clicks&lt;br /&gt;
* parametric search (every component type keeps an individual set of parameters to be set for search)&lt;br /&gt;
* semantic search (keyword &amp;quot;led red&amp;quot;  e.g. leads you to red LEDs. Keyword &amp;quot;4k75W&amp;quot; e.g. leads to the resistors)&lt;br /&gt;
* Creation of new or modified components within the data base as derivates of existing parts (independently from schematic and layout)  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Two-user situation with two local SQLite component databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: cronjob.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 2:&#039;&#039;&#039; Two-user situation with local SQLite component databases&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If only Chris creates components working with a SQLite setup can continue. A CRON-Job could copy the data base file from Chris to Robin after each change. Then no MySQL server would be necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network with access to one central [[MySQL]] client-server data base ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Server2_e.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 3:&#039;&#039;&#039; Network with access to one central [[MySQL]] client-server data base&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* the expert solution for the administration of huge amounts of data  &lt;br /&gt;
* [[MySQL]]-power in a Client-Server-Network&lt;br /&gt;
* all colleagues use the same common database and not hundreds of separate libraries &lt;br /&gt;
* open and well proven data base technology&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Client-Server-Network giving access to one central data base ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: Server3.png|750px|TARGET 3001! on a server]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Image 4:&#039;&#039;&#039; Client-Server-Network giving access to one central data base. There is oportunity to install a mirror of the [[MySQL]] database on an external computer (Michael) to run it SQLite and bring it back.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* direct use of the transfered data base&lt;br /&gt;
* data import into an existing data base (Michael or Peter)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=Network%20situations%20with%20the%20TARGET%203001!%20database I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Update the component database =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Update the component database|Please have a look here...]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Convert older libraries to the data base =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:v14import_0_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the data base dialog select menu &amp;quot;Extras/Import libraries SYM3001, REF3001 and PCK3001&amp;quot;. A browser opens from which you can choose your source libs. Confirm the selection with OK and then press button &amp;quot;Import components&amp;quot; (bottom right).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:v14import_1_e.jpg|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now TARGET 3001! checks whether your existing component types (rem: a component type in V14 and older is represented by it&#039;s path in the tree view) matches with the data base. As a result you get your old parts listed in colored line to the left.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:v14import_2.jpg|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In the left column you will see &amp;quot;your&amp;quot; component types according to your structure. The colors mean:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Green:&#039;&#039;&#039; Component group and type already exist in the database - files can be overtaken directly. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Blue:&#039;&#039;&#039; Component group  and -type matches with the data base structure but needs to be generated this individual way by TARGET 3001! (automatically done).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Red:&#039;&#039;&#039; Component group and -type (s) are unknown to the database. The user must do the assignment manually.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
At any time you can do an assignment to a component type by &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; upon the line in question.&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:v14import_3_.jpg|750px]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or you may use the button &amp;quot;Assign a different component type V15&amp;quot;. You then select an appropriate component type or you create a new one by &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also a new component group can be created by &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; upon the gray background of any component group. See main window of component browser left hand side:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:v14import_4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a user has duplicated a certain part for his own purposes, so there is a hash (#) and a perpetual number fixed to it in the sense of &amp;quot;which copy number is this?&amp;quot; At the same time the flag &amp;quot;User&amp;quot; is fixed to it. That means that the user has manipulated this component. Thus it is taken to the amount of &amp;quot;own&amp;quot; components. It will remain untouched by automated component updates.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:V14import_5_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the TAB &amp;quot;My components prior to V15&amp;quot; you see the sub-groups &amp;quot;Libraries&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Component tree view&amp;quot; each with the display you know from those days....&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:v14import_7.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: taken from Version 15...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=Convert%20older%20libraries%20to%20the%20data%20base I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Lists for components and packages =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the database there is no copy of the same part with identical name and manufacturer. Nevertheless a certain component can be part of one or more individual lists created by the user. For example the list: &amp;quot;My preferred operational amps&amp;quot; or the list: &amp;quot;Parts for TV, Phono&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Peter&#039;s parts&amp;quot; oder &amp;quot;The parts of the stepmotor project&amp;quot; or ...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Liste1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thinking in lists is similar to thinking in libraries which means to show a selection of parts according to certain creteria. Assign a part to a list by klicking [[M2]] at the part in the main view of the component browser. Now follow the dialogs of the option bottom of list:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Liste1a_e.jpg|Right mouseclick on the line of a part allows assigning it to a list|none]]Right mouseclick on the line of a part allows assigning it to a list&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to edit lists, please see menu Extra / EditSymbol/Package lists:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Liste2_e.jpg|This image shows how to edit, rename, delete ... a component list|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=Lists%20for%20components%20and%20packages I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Data base backup when upgrading =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the installation of TARGET 3001! a destination directory is proposed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: datenbankverzeichnis_e.png|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Proposed directory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and the component data base will be copied to a sub directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;C:\Programs\ibf\TarVx\discover\AppData\Database\&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If TARGET 3001! gets started the first time the data base will be transfered to &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;C:\Documents and settings\&amp;lt;your user&amp;gt;\ApplicationData\ibf\TarVx\discover\Database\&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; The directory may vary according to the Operation System. TARGET now uses the data base from the &amp;quot;ApplicationData&amp;quot; - directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So there will be used different data base directories for the versions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user grades up from a smart to an economy, he needs to copy his smart database to the Economy directory &#039;&#039;&#039;or&#039;&#039;&#039; point the database path in Menu Settings/Settings (INI-File)...&amp;quot; to the smart data base directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TARGET 3001! at this time does not check during the installation process whether a version already exists in order to use its database.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=Data%20base%20backup%20when%20upgrading I have got a question here...]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Update V16 --&amp;gt; V17 --&amp;gt; V18. What about the database? =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During a V18 installation by default a new data base gets installed. If you had a V15, V16 or a V17 with a database which keeps your USER parts sure you like to use them in V18 as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the installation of your new main version you get asked whether to overtake an earlier database. Select and decide from the dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively set the database path in V18 to your existing database from V15, V16 or V17. You also might copy your old data base to the directory where your new Version of TARGET expects it to be.  DON&#039;T USE the Import/Export function in the component browser. This is meant only for individual parts.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Import components from external sources directly into the TARGET component database =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;I am a component manufacturer and would like to import my components directly into the TARGET component data base. Every TARGET user should have immediate access to the CAD data of my components including data sheet link and link to my shop.&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this you need a MySQL access to the TARGET 3001! component database, please contact us:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?Subject=mySQL_Zugang I am a component manufacturer and would like to have mySQL access...]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your access data could look like this:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Server: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;office.ibfriedrich.com&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
User: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;MyUsername&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Password: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;MyPassword&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Here you have to enter these:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:BtlHerstDB1_e.jpg|Access data|none]]Image: You can only edit the components of the user whom you represent as the manufacturer. This means that the company &#039;&#039;Miller&#039;&#039; cannot change the components of the company &#039;&#039;Smith&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteildatenbank]][[Fr:Base de données des composants]] [[Category: homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Eagle&amp;diff=28959</id>
		<title>Eagle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Eagle&amp;diff=28959"/>
		<updated>2021-07-19T08:12:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* Advantages of TARGET 3001! over Eagle */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| border =&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding =&amp;quot;20&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;!--[[Image:eagleE_grau.png|Eagle-Logo]]--&amp;gt;[[Image:cs_eagle_logo140.jpg]]||&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Eagle*&#039;&#039;&#039; is a wide spread PCB Layout CAD System. In earlier days the brand was a registered trademark of CadSoft in Pleiskirchen (Germany). August 2009 Eagle and CadSoft had been acquired by the part-distributor [http://www.elektroniknet.de/halbleiter/sonstiges/artikel/23824/ Premier Farnell].  July 2016 Premier Farnell had been acquired by  [http://www.elektroniknet.de/distribution/strategie-trends/artikel/131187/ Dätwyler]. Eagle und Cadsoft then had been sold to  [http://www.heise.de/make/meldung/Platinenlayouts-Autodesk-uebernimmt-den-Eagle-Hersteller-CadSoft-3251345.html Autodesk®].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;Eagle is a registered trademark of Autodesk®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The following articles may help you starting in TARGET 3001! while coming from Eagle. You can convert your Eagle-files to TARGET 3001! and convert them from TARGET 3001! to Eagle. Also your private Eagle libraries can be converted to TARGET 3001!. Also a summary explains the Eagle text commands and how you would do it in TARGET 3001!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Open an Eagle project|Open an Eagle project in TARGET 3001!]]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Import an Eagle component library |Import an Eagle component library to the TARGET 3001! component data base]]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Eagle commands and how to do it in TARGET 3001]] [http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/en/Eagle_vs_TARGET_e.pdf PDF]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Convert TARGET 3001! to Eagle|Export a TARGET file to EAGLE]]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Advantages of TARGET 3001! over Eagle ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*no node locking (investment security: You can install your TARGET license on any PC whenever and wherever you like)&lt;br /&gt;
*independence from commercial decisions of a dominating principal (Eagle is owned by Autodesk®)&lt;br /&gt;
*telephone and eMail service supplied for every user (includes user of the demo version) &lt;br /&gt;
*all project information (schematic, pcb, simulation, 3D, data sheet links, ordering numbers, front panel design etc.) is gathered in [[Single database|one single project file]].&lt;br /&gt;
*real time data integration, no versions conflicts between schematic and board.&lt;br /&gt;
*automatic internal forward-back-annotation.&lt;br /&gt;
*the complete handling in one single Windows application.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Simulation|mixed-mode simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*full functional live [[3D|3D-view]] with various 3D functions including STEP export (not just a rendered static image)!&lt;br /&gt;
*STEP import - read in of 3D data offered by manufacturers on the web&lt;br /&gt;
*direct access to components in a SQL data base offering the complete performance of a relational data base&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Component Management System|commercial infos]] on your parts (price, availability, data sheet link) on button click&lt;br /&gt;
*maintain [[RoHS]]- or any other information as component property down to BoM&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Engraving insulation channels|Isolation milling]] of your prototypes on button click&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Frontpanel|front panel design]] within the PCB development environment&lt;br /&gt;
*no fear of Load Error 293:&lt;br /&gt;
**[http://www.mikrocontroller.net/topic/33661 Thread on the Load Error 293 in the mikrocontroller forum (German)]&lt;br /&gt;
**[http://www.edaboard.com/ftopic43096.html Thread on the Load Error 293 in the edaboard forum]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Component|Components]] still editable in schematic and layout, independent from the component data base&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Package Generator|package generator]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Pin#Edit_selected_pin_names_in_a_text_editor|edit pin functions like a text]]&lt;br /&gt;
*etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Use the advantages of both systems!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our aim is to give you the chance to use both systems as efficiently as possible and to lower any obstacles. That&#039;s the reason why you can open an Eagle File in TARGET 3001! and convert a TARGET file the way that you can open it in Eagle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Eagle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Eagle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Data exchange]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Eagle&amp;diff=28958</id>
		<title>Eagle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Eagle&amp;diff=28958"/>
		<updated>2021-07-19T07:50:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| border =&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding =&amp;quot;20&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;!--[[Image:eagleE_grau.png|Eagle-Logo]]--&amp;gt;[[Image:cs_eagle_logo140.jpg]]||&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Eagle*&#039;&#039;&#039; is a wide spread PCB Layout CAD System. In earlier days the brand was a registered trademark of CadSoft in Pleiskirchen (Germany). August 2009 Eagle and CadSoft had been acquired by the part-distributor [http://www.elektroniknet.de/halbleiter/sonstiges/artikel/23824/ Premier Farnell].  July 2016 Premier Farnell had been acquired by  [http://www.elektroniknet.de/distribution/strategie-trends/artikel/131187/ Dätwyler]. Eagle und Cadsoft then had been sold to  [http://www.heise.de/make/meldung/Platinenlayouts-Autodesk-uebernimmt-den-Eagle-Hersteller-CadSoft-3251345.html Autodesk®].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;Eagle is a registered trademark of Autodesk®&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The following articles may help you starting in TARGET 3001! while coming from Eagle. You can convert your Eagle-files to TARGET 3001! and convert them from TARGET 3001! to Eagle. Also your private Eagle libraries can be converted to TARGET 3001!. Also a summary explains the Eagle text commands and how you would do it in TARGET 3001!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Open an Eagle project|Open an Eagle project in TARGET 3001!]]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Import an Eagle component library |Import an Eagle component library to the TARGET 3001! component data base]]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Eagle commands and how to do it in TARGET 3001]] [http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/en/Eagle_vs_TARGET_e.pdf PDF]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Convert TARGET 3001! to Eagle|Export a TARGET file to EAGLE]]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Advantages of TARGET 3001! over Eagle ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*no node locking (investment security: You can install your TARGET license on any PC whenever and wherever you like)&lt;br /&gt;
*independence from commercial decisions of a dominating principal (Eagle is owned by Autodesk®)&lt;br /&gt;
*telephone and eMail service supplied for every user (includes user of the demo version) &lt;br /&gt;
*all project information (schematic, pcb, simulation, 3D, data sheet links, ordering numbers, front panel design etc.) is gathered in [[Single database|one single project file]].&lt;br /&gt;
*real time data integration, no versions conflicts between schematic and board.&lt;br /&gt;
*automatic internal forward-back-annotation.&lt;br /&gt;
*the complete handling in one single Windows application.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Simulation|mixed-mode simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*full functional live [[3D|3D-view]] with various 3D functions including STEP export (not just a rendered static image)!&lt;br /&gt;
*STEP import - read in of 3D data offered by manufacturers on the web&lt;br /&gt;
*direct access to components in a SQL data base offering the complete performance of a relational data base&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Component Management System|commercial infos]] on your parts (price, availability, data sheet link) on button click&lt;br /&gt;
*maintain [[RoHS]]- or any other information as component property down to BoM&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Engraving insulation channels|Isolation milling]] of your prototypes on button click&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Frontpanel|front panel design]] within the PCB development environment&lt;br /&gt;
*no fear of Load Error 293:&lt;br /&gt;
**[http://www.mikrocontroller.net/topic/33661 Thread on the Load Error 293 in the mikrocontroller forum (German)]&lt;br /&gt;
**[http://www.edaboard.com/ftopic43096.html Thread on the Load Error 293 in the edaboard forum]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Component|Components]] still editable in schematic and layout, independent from the component data base&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Package Generator|package generator]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Pin#Edit_selected_pin_names_in_a_text_editor|edit pin functions like a text]]&lt;br /&gt;
*etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Use the advantages of both systems!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our aim is to give you the chance to use both systems as efficiently as possible and to keep the hurdles between both systems low. That&#039;s the reason why you can open an Eagle File in TARGET 3001! and convert a TARGET file the way that you can open it in Eagle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Eagle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Eagle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Data exchange]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Eagle&amp;diff=28957</id>
		<title>Eagle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Eagle&amp;diff=28957"/>
		<updated>2021-07-19T07:49:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| border =&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding =&amp;quot;20&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;!--[[Image:eagleE_grau.png|Eagle-Logo]]--&amp;gt;[[Image:cs_eagle_logo140.jpg]]||&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Eagle*&#039;&#039;&#039; is a wide spread PCB Layout CAD System. In earlier days the brand was a registered trademark of CadSoft in Pleiskirchen (Germany). August 2009 Eagle and CadSoft had been acquired by the part-distributor [http://www.elektroniknet.de/halbleiter/sonstiges/artikel/23824/ Premier Farnell].  July 2016 Premier Farnell had been acquired by  [http://www.elektroniknet.de/distribution/strategie-trends/artikel/131187/ Dätwyler]. Eagle und Cadsoft then had been sold to  [http://www.heise.de/make/meldung/Platinenlayouts-Autodesk-uebernimmt-den-Eagle-Hersteller-CadSoft-3251345.html Autodesk®].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;Eagle is a registered trademark of Autodesk.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The following articles may help you starting in TARGET 3001! while coming from Eagle. You can convert your Eagle-files to TARGET 3001! and convert them from TARGET 3001! to Eagle. Also your private Eagle libraries can be converted to TARGET 3001!. Also a summary explains the Eagle text commands and how you would do it in TARGET 3001!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Open an Eagle project|Open an Eagle project in TARGET 3001!]]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Import an Eagle component library |Import an Eagle component library to the TARGET 3001! component data base]]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Eagle commands and how to do it in TARGET 3001]] [http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/en/Eagle_vs_TARGET_e.pdf PDF]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Convert TARGET 3001! to Eagle|Export a TARGET file to EAGLE]]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Advantages of TARGET 3001! over Eagle ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*no node locking (investment security: You can install your TARGET license on any PC whenever and wherever you like)&lt;br /&gt;
*independence from commercial decisions of a dominating principal (Eagle is owned by Autodesk®)&lt;br /&gt;
*telephone and eMail service supplied for every user (includes user of the demo version) &lt;br /&gt;
*all project information (schematic, pcb, simulation, 3D, data sheet links, ordering numbers, front panel design etc.) is gathered in [[Single database|one single project file]].&lt;br /&gt;
*real time data integration, no versions conflicts between schematic and board.&lt;br /&gt;
*automatic internal forward-back-annotation.&lt;br /&gt;
*the complete handling in one single Windows application.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Simulation|mixed-mode simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*full functional live [[3D|3D-view]] with various 3D functions including STEP export (not just a rendered static image)!&lt;br /&gt;
*STEP import - read in of 3D data offered by manufacturers on the web&lt;br /&gt;
*direct access to components in a SQL data base offering the complete performance of a relational data base&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Component Management System|commercial infos]] on your parts (price, availability, data sheet link) on button click&lt;br /&gt;
*maintain [[RoHS]]- or any other information as component property down to BoM&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Engraving insulation channels|Isolation milling]] of your prototypes on button click&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Frontpanel|front panel design]] within the PCB development environment&lt;br /&gt;
*no fear of Load Error 293:&lt;br /&gt;
**[http://www.mikrocontroller.net/topic/33661 Thread on the Load Error 293 in the mikrocontroller forum (German)]&lt;br /&gt;
**[http://www.edaboard.com/ftopic43096.html Thread on the Load Error 293 in the edaboard forum]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Component|Components]] still editable in schematic and layout, independent from the component data base&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Package Generator|package generator]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Pin#Edit_selected_pin_names_in_a_text_editor|edit pin functions like a text]]&lt;br /&gt;
*etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Use the advantages of both systems!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our aim is to give you the chance to use both systems as efficiently as possible and to keep the hurdles between both systems low. That&#039;s the reason why you can open an Eagle File in TARGET 3001! and convert a TARGET file the way that you can open it in Eagle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Eagle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Eagle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Data exchange]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Eagle&amp;diff=28956</id>
		<title>Eagle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Eagle&amp;diff=28956"/>
		<updated>2021-07-19T07:45:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: /* Advantages of TARGET 3001! over Eagle */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| border =&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding =&amp;quot;20&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;!--[[Image:eagleE_grau.png|Eagle-Logo]]--&amp;gt;[[Image:cs_eagle_logo140.jpg]]||&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Eagle*&#039;&#039;&#039; is a wide spread PCB Layout CAD System. In earlier days the brand was a registered trademark of CadSoft in Pleiskirchen (Germany). August 2009 Eagle and CadSoft had been acquired by the part-distributor [http://www.elektroniknet.de/halbleiter/sonstiges/artikel/23824/ Premier Farnell].  July 2016 Premier Farnell had been acquired by  [http://www.elektroniknet.de/distribution/strategie-trends/artikel/131187/ Dätwyler]. Eagle und Cadsoft then had been sold to  [http://www.heise.de/make/meldung/Platinenlayouts-Autodesk-uebernimmt-den-Eagle-Hersteller-CadSoft-3251345.html Autodesk].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;Eagle is a registered trademark of Autodesk.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The following articles may help you starting in TARGET 3001! while coming from Eagle. You can convert your Eagle-files to TARGET 3001! and convert them from TARGET 3001! to Eagle. Also your private Eagle libraries can be converted to TARGET 3001!. Also a summary explains the Eagle text commands and how you would do it in TARGET 3001!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Open an Eagle project|Open an Eagle project in TARGET 3001!]]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Import an Eagle component library |Import an Eagle component library to the TARGET 3001! component data base]]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Eagle commands and how to do it in TARGET 3001]] [http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/en/Eagle_vs_TARGET_e.pdf PDF]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;[[Convert TARGET 3001! to Eagle|Export a TARGET file to EAGLE]]&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Advantages of TARGET 3001! over Eagle ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*no node locking (investment security: You can install your TARGET license on any PC whenever and wherever you like)&lt;br /&gt;
*independence from commercial decisions of a dominating principal (Eagle is owned by Autodesk®)&lt;br /&gt;
*telephone and eMail service supplied for every user (includes user of the demo version) &lt;br /&gt;
*all project information (schematic, pcb, simulation, 3D, data sheet links, ordering numbers, front panel design etc.) is gathered in [[Single database|one single project file]].&lt;br /&gt;
*real time data integration, no versions conflicts between schematic and board.&lt;br /&gt;
*automatic internal forward-back-annotation.&lt;br /&gt;
*the complete handling in one single Windows application.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Simulation|mixed-mode simulation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*full functional live [[3D|3D-view]] with various 3D functions including STEP export (not just a rendered static image)!&lt;br /&gt;
*STEP import - read in of 3D data offered by manufacturers on the web&lt;br /&gt;
*direct access to components in a SQL data base offering the complete performance of a relational data base&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Component Management System|commercial infos]] on your parts (price, availability, data sheet link) on button click&lt;br /&gt;
*maintain [[RoHS]]- or any other information as component property down to BoM&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Engraving insulation channels|Isolation milling]] of your prototypes on button click&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Frontpanel|front panel design]] within the PCB development environment&lt;br /&gt;
*no fear of Load Error 293:&lt;br /&gt;
**[http://www.mikrocontroller.net/topic/33661 Thread on the Load Error 293 in the mikrocontroller forum (German)]&lt;br /&gt;
**[http://www.edaboard.com/ftopic43096.html Thread on the Load Error 293 in the edaboard forum]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Component|Components]] still editable in schematic and layout, independent from the component data base&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Package Generator|package generator]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Pin#Edit_selected_pin_names_in_a_text_editor|edit pin functions like a text]]&lt;br /&gt;
*etc...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Use the advantages of both systems!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our aim is to give you the chance to use both systems as efficiently as possible and to keep the hurdles between both systems low. That&#039;s the reason why you can open an Eagle File in TARGET 3001! and convert a TARGET file the way that you can open it in Eagle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Eagle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Eagle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Data exchange]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28955</id>
		<title>School</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28955"/>
		<updated>2021-07-15T14:49:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;15&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:Target_packshot.png]]||&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block; margin-right: 20px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:Target_packshot.png]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Campus licence =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Unlimited number of seats&lt;br /&gt;
*It has the power of edition &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*It may be installed  on the students private computers&lt;br /&gt;
*It is a trial version with a duration of 2 years, = 730 days from purchase&lt;br /&gt;
*After two years, it must be purchased again by the university and a new licence number is issued&lt;br /&gt;
*Students have to reinstall it after two years if they get download access from the institute/university/college&lt;br /&gt;
*Licence fee is to be paid in advance&lt;br /&gt;
*It mustn&#039;t be used other than for non commercial reasons (NC).&lt;br /&gt;
*The campus license is not part of an update price scheme. Also it will not be part of any of our discount events&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A TARGET 3001! school version - or as we say &#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039; - is intended for universities, universities of applied sciences, technical colleges and educational institutes teaching subjects of electronics. The license agreement will allow the school to install this software to an unlimited number of PCs of the institute. So an unlimited simultaneous use is given. Students are permitted to copy the software to their personal laptops or workstations at home. The school will be asked to sign a &#039;&#039;&#039;license agreement&#039;&#039;&#039;. The license agreement states that the school will be using this software only for educational purposes. This excludes any commercial use or use by third parties (other institutes).  It expires after two years. Then a new licence must be purchased. Files generated by this license can easily be identified as such.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;School version TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot; classroom license  (16 workstations)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;design station&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||444.54||84.46||529.00&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/klassenraum_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_classroom_license Demand for a classroom license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Campus license TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(unlimited workstations, dedicated to the students of the institute)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||488.99||92.91||581.90&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/campus_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_campus_license Demand for a campus license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Ausbildungsversion]][[fr:ecôle]][[Category:Homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28954</id>
		<title>School</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28954"/>
		<updated>2021-07-15T13:42:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;15&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:Target_packshot.png]]||&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block; margin-right: 20px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:Target_packshot.png]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Campus licence =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Unlimited number of seats&lt;br /&gt;
*It has the power of edition &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*It may be installed  on the students private computers&lt;br /&gt;
*It is a trial version with a duration of 2 years, = 730 days from purchase&lt;br /&gt;
*After two years, it must be purchased again by the university and a new licence number is issued&lt;br /&gt;
*Students have to reinstall it after two years if they get download access from the institute/university/college&lt;br /&gt;
*It is  EUR 488,99 (ex VAT), to be paid in advance&lt;br /&gt;
*It mustn&#039;t be used other than for non commercial reasons (NC).&lt;br /&gt;
*The campus license is not part of an update price scheme. Also it will not be part of any of our discount events&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A TARGET 3001! school version - or as we say &#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039; - is intended for universities, universities of applied sciences, technical colleges and educational institutes teaching subjects of electronics. The license agreement will allow the school to install this software to an unlimited number of PCs of the institute. So an unlimited simultaneous use is given. Students are permitted to copy the software to their personal laptops or workstations at home. The school will be asked to sign a &#039;&#039;&#039;license agreement&#039;&#039;&#039;. The license agreement states that the school will be using this software only for educational purposes. This excludes any commercial use or use by third parties (other institutes).  It expires after two years. Then a new licence must be purchased. Files generated by this license can easily be identified as such.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;School version TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot; classroom license  (16 workstations)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;design station&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||444.54||84.46||529.00&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/klassenraum_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_classroom_license Demand for a classroom license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Campus license TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(unlimited workstations, dedicated to the students of the institute)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||488.99||92.91||581.90&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/campus_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_campus_license Demand for a campus license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Ausbildungsversion]][[fr:ecôle]][[Category:Homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28953</id>
		<title>School</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28953"/>
		<updated>2021-07-15T13:38:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;15&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:Target_packshot.png]]||&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block; margin-right: 20px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:Target_packshot.png]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Campus Licence =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*TARGET 3001! V30 campus licence (unlimited number of seats)&lt;br /&gt;
*It has the power of edition &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*It may be installed  on the students private computers&lt;br /&gt;
*It is a trial version with a duration of 2 years, = 730 days from purchase&lt;br /&gt;
*After two years, it must be purchased again by the university and a new licence number is issued&lt;br /&gt;
*Students have to reinstall it after two years if they get download access from their university&lt;br /&gt;
*It costs  EUR 488,99 (ex VAT), to be paid in advance&lt;br /&gt;
*It mustn&#039;t be used other than for non commercial reasons (NC).&lt;br /&gt;
*The campus license is not part of an update price scheme. Also it will not be part of any of our discount events&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A TARGET 3001! school version - or as we say &#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039; - is intended for universities, universities of applied sciences, technical colleges and educational institutes teaching subjects of electronics. The license agreement will allow the school to copy this software to an unlimited number of simultaneous users. Students are permitted to copy the software to their personal laptops or workstations at home. The school will be asked to sign a &#039;&#039;&#039;license agreement&#039;&#039;&#039;. The license agreement states that the school will be using this software only for educational purposes. This excludes any commercial use or use by third parties.  It expires after two years. Then a new licence must be purchased. Files generated by this license can easily be identified as such.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;School version TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot; classroom license  (16 workstations)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;design station&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||444.54||84.46||529.00&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/klassenraum_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_classroom_license Demand for a classroom license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Campus license TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(unlimited workstations, dedicated to the students of the institute)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||488.99||92.91||581.90&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/campus_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_campus_license Demand for a campus license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Ausbildungsversion]][[fr:ecôle]][[Category:Homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28952</id>
		<title>School</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28952"/>
		<updated>2021-07-15T13:12:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;15&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:Target_packshot.png]]||&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block; margin-right: 20px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:Target_packshot.png]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Campus Licence =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A TARGET 3001! school version - or as we say &#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039; - is intended for universities, universities of applied sciences, technical colleges and educational institutes teaching subjects of electronics. The license agreement will allow the school to copy this software to an unlimited number of simultaneous users. Students are permitted to copy the software to their personal laptops or workstations at home. The school will be asked to sign a &#039;&#039;&#039;license agreement&#039;&#039;&#039;. The license agreement states that the school will be using this software only for educational purposes. This excludes any commercial use or use by third parties. Files generated by this version can easily be identified. It expires after two years. Then a new licence must be purchased.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;School version TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot; classroom license  (16 workstations)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;design station&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||444.54||84.46||529.00&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/klassenraum_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_classroom_license Demand for a classroom license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Campus license TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(unlimited workstations, dedicated to the students of the institute)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||488.99||92.91||581.90&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/campus_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_campus_license Demand for a campus license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Ausbildungsversion]][[fr:ecôle]][[Category:Homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28951</id>
		<title>School</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28951"/>
		<updated>2021-07-15T13:10:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;15&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:Target_packshot.png]]||&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block; margin-right: 20px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:Target_packshot.png]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Campus Licence =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A TARGET 3001! school version - or as we say &#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039; - is intended for universities, universities of applied sciences, technical colleges and educational institutes teaching subjects of electronics. The license agreement will allow the school to copy this software to an unlimited number of simultaneous users. Students are permitted to copy the software to their personal laptops or workstations at home. The school will be asked to sign a &#039;&#039;&#039;license agreement&#039;&#039;&#039;. The license agreement states that the school will be using this software only for educational purposes. This excludes any commercial use or use by third parties. Files generated by this version can easily be identified. It expires after two years. Then a new licence must be purchased.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;School version TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot; classroom license  (16 workstations)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;design station&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||444.54||84.46||529.00&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/klassenraum_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_classroom_license Demand for a classroom license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Campus license TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot; (unlimited workstations, dedicated to the students of the institute)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||488.99||92.91||581.90&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/campus_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_campus_license Demand for a campus license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Ausbildungsversion]][[fr:ecôle]][[Category:Homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28950</id>
		<title>School</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28950"/>
		<updated>2021-07-15T13:09:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;15&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:Target_packshot.png]]||&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block; margin-right: 20px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:Target_packshot.png]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A TARGET 3001! school version - or as we say &#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039; - is intended for universities, universities of applied sciences, technical colleges and educational institutes teaching subjects of electronics. The license agreement will allow the school to copy this software to an unlimited number of simultaneous users. Students are permitted to copy the software to their personal laptops or workstations at home. The school will be asked to sign a &#039;&#039;&#039;license agreement&#039;&#039;&#039;. The license agreement states that the school will be using this software only for educational purposes. This excludes any commercial use or use by third parties. Files generated by this version can easily be identified. It expires after two years. Then a new licence must be purchased.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;School version TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot; classroom license  (16 workstations)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;design station&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||444.54||84.46||529.00&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/klassenraum_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_classroom_license Demand for a classroom license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Campus license TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot; (unlimited workstations, dedicated to the students of the institute)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||488.99||92.91||581.90&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/campus_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_campus_license Demand for a campus license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Ausbildungsversion]][[fr:ecôle]][[Category:Homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28949</id>
		<title>School</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=School&amp;diff=28949"/>
		<updated>2021-07-15T13:08:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Markus Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{|cellpadding=&amp;quot;15&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:Target_packshot.png]]||&lt;br /&gt;
|}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block; margin-right: 20px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:Target_packshot.png]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;float: left; display: inline-block;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A TARGET 3001! school version - or as we say &#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039; - is intended for universities, universities of applied sciences, technical colleges and educational institutes teaching subjects of electronics. The license agreement will allow the school to copy this software to an unlimited number of simultaneous users. Students are permitted to copy the software to their personal laptops or workstations at home. The school will be asked to sign a &#039;&#039;&#039;license agreement&#039;&#039;&#039;. The license agreement states that the school will be using this software only for educational purposes. This excludes any commercial use or use by third parties. Files generated by this version can easily be identified. It expires after two years. Then a new licence must be purchased.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;School version TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot; classroom license  (16 workstations)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;design station&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||444.54||84.46||529.00&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/klassenraum_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_classroom_license Demand for a classroom license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Campus license TARGET 3001! &amp;quot;design station&amp;quot; (unlimited workstations, dedicated to the students of the institute)&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
unlim. # of Pins/Pads, 100 copper layers, Simulation: unlimited # of signals&lt;br /&gt;
{|class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;5&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;campus licence&#039;&#039;&#039;||Net||VAT (19%)||Subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;EUR&#039;&#039;&#039;||488.99||92.91||581.90&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[http://server.ibfriedrich.com/download/pdf/campus_e.pdf PDF license agreement]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com?subject=Demand_for_campus_license Demand for a campus license]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Ausbildungsversion]][[fr:ecôle]][[Category:Homepage]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Markus Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>